Locating a mobile station and applications therefor

ABSTRACT

A location system and applications therefor is disclosed for wireless telecommunication infrastructures. The system is an end-to-end solution having one or more location systems for outputting requested locations of hand sets or mobile stations (MS) based on, e.g., CDMA, GSM, GPRS, TDMA or WIFI communication standards, for processing both local mobile station location requests and more global mobile station location requests via, e.g., Internet communication between a distributed network of location systems. The following applications may be enabled by the location system: 911 emergency calls, tracking, navigation, people and animal location including applications for confinement to and exclusion from certain areas, friend finder applications, and applications for allocating user desired resources based on the user&#39;s location.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

The present application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/069,441 filed Mar. 1, 2005, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/820,584 filed Mar. 28, 2001 (now U.S. Pat. No. 6,952,181), and U.S. application Ser. No. 09/820,584 is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/230,109 filed Jul. 8, 1999 (now U.S. Pat. No. 6,236,365) which is the National Stage of International Application No. PCT/US97/15933 filed Sep. 8, 1997 which, in turn, claims the benefit of the following three applications: U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/056,603 filed Aug. 20, 1997, U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/044,821 filed Apr. 25, 1997; and U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/025,855 filed Sep. 9, 1996.

All the above cited references are fully incorporated by reference herein.

RELATED FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present disclosure is directed generally to a system and method for wirelessly locating mobile stations and using such locations, and in particular, to a system and method for locating a wireless mobile radio station.

BACKGROUND

Wireless communications systems are becoming increasingly important worldwide. Wireless cellular telecommunications systems are rapidly replacing conventional wire-based telecommunications systems in many applications. Commercial mobile radio service provider networks, and specialized mobile radio and mobile data radio networks are examples. The general principles of wireless cellular telephony have been described variously, for example in U.S. Pat. No. 5,295,180 to Vendetti, et al filed Apr. 8, 1992, which is incorporated herein by reference. There is great interest in using existing infrastructures for wireless communication systems for locating people and/or objects in a cost-effective manner. Such a capability would be invaluable in a variety of situations, especially in emergency or crime situations. Due to the substantial benefits of such a location system, several attempts have been made to design and implement such a system. Systems have been proposed that rely upon signal strength and trilateralization techniques to permit location include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,818,998 filed Mar. 31, 1986 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,908,629 filed Dec. 5, 1988 both to Apsell et al. (“the Apsell patents”), and U.S. Pat. No. 4,891,650 to Sheffer (“the Sheffer patent”) filed May 16, 1988. The Apsell patents disclose a system employing a “homing-in” scheme using radio signal strength, wherein the scheme detects radio signal strength transmitted from an unknown location. This signal strength is detected by nearby tracking vehicles, such as police cruisers using receivers with directional antennas. Alternatively, the Sheffer patent discloses a system using the FM analog cellular network. This system includes a mobile transmitter located on a vehicle to be located. The transmitter transmits an alarm signal upon activation to detectors located at base stations of the cellular network. These detectors receive the transmitted signal and transmit, to a central station, data indicating the signal strength of the received signal and the identity of the base stations receiving the signal. This data is processed to determine the distance between the vehicle and each of the base stations and, through trilateralization, the vehicle's position. However, these systems have drawbacks that include high expense in that special purpose electronics are required. Furthermore, the systems are generally only effective in line-of-sight conditions, such as rural settings. Radio wave surface reflections, refractions and ground clutter cause significant distortion, in determining the location of a signal source in most geographical areas that are more than sparsely populated. Moreover, these drawbacks are particularly exacerbated in dense urban canyon (city) areas, where errors and/or conflicts in location measurements can result in substantial inaccuracies.

Another example of a location system using time of arrival and triangulation for location are satellite-based systems, such as the military and commercial versions of the Global Positioning Satellite system (GPS). GPS can provide accurate position determination (i.e., about 100 meters error for the commercial version of GPS) from a time-based signal received simultaneously from at least three satellites. A ground-based GPS receiver at or near the object to be located determines the difference between the time at which each satellite transmits a time signal and the time at which the signal is received and, based on the time differentials, determines the object's location. However, the GPS is impractical in many applications. The signal power levels from the satellites are low and the GPS receiver requires a clear, line-of-sight path to at least three satellites above a horizon of about 60 degrees for effective operation. Accordingly, inclement weather conditions, such as clouds, terrain features, such as hills and trees, and buildings restrict the ability of the GPS receiver to determine its position. Furthermore, the initial GPS signal detection process for a GPS receiver is relatively long (i.e., several minutes) for determining the receivers position. Such delays are unacceptable in many applications such as, for example, emergency response and vehicle tracking.

Differential GPS, or DGPS systems offer correction schemes to account for time synchronization drift. Such correction schemes include the transmission of correction signals over a two-way radio link or broadcast via FM radio station subcarriers. These systems have been found to be awkward and have met with limited success.

Additionally, GPS-based location systems have been attempted in which the received GPS signals are transmitted to a central data center for performing location calculations. Such systems have also met with limited success due, for example, to the limited reception of the satellite signals and the added expense and complexity of the electronics required for an inexpensive location mobile station or handset for detecting and receiving the GPS signals from the satellites.

The behavior of a mobile radio signal in the general environment is unique and complicated. Efforts to perform correlation between radio signals and distance between a base station and a mobile station are similarly complex. Repeated attempts to solve this problem in the past have been met with only marginal success. Factors include terrain undulations, fixed and variable clutter, atmospheric conditions, internal radio characteristics of cellular and PCS systems, such as frequencies, antenna configurations, modulation schemes, diversity methods, and the physical geometry of direct, refracted and reflected waves between the base stations and the mobile. Noise, such as man-made externally sources (e.g., auto ignitions) and radio system co-channel and adjacent channel interference also affect radio reception and related performance measurements, such as the analog carrier-to-interference ratio (C/I), or digital energy-per-bit/Noise density ratio (E_(b/No)) and are particular to various points in time and space domains.

Before discussing real world correlation between signals and distance, it is useful to review the theoretical premise, that of radio energy path loss across a pure isotropic vacuum propagation channel, and its dependencies within and among various communications channel types.

Over the last forty years various mathematical expressions have been developed to assist the radio mobile cell designer in establishing the proper balance between base station capital investment and the quality of the radio link, typically using radio energy field-strength, usually measured in microvolts/meter, or decibels.

One consequence from a location perspective is that the effective range of values for higher exponents is an increased at higher frequencies, thus providing improved granularity of ranging correlation.

Actual data collected in real-world environments uncovered huge variations with respect to the free space path loss equation, giving rise to the creation of many empirical formulas for radio signal coverage prediction. Clutter, either fixed or stationary in geometric relation to the propagation of the radio signals, causes a shadow effect of blocking that perturbs the free space loss effect. Perhaps the best known model set that characterizes the average path loss is Hata's, “Empirical Formula for Propagation Loss in Land Mobile Radio”, M. Hata, IEEE Transactions VT-29, pp. 317-325, August 1980, three pathloss models, based on Okumura's measurements in and around Tokyo, “Field Strength and its Variability in VHF and UHF Land Mobile Service”, Y. Okumura, et al, Review of the Electrical Communications laboratory, Vol 16, pp 825-873, September-October 1968.

Although the Hata model was found to be useful for generalized RF wave prediction in frequencies under 1 GHz in certain suburban and rural settings, as either the frequency and/or clutter increased, predictability decreased. In current practice, however, field technicians often have to make a guess for dense urban an suburban areas (applying whatever model seems best), then installing a base stations and begin taking manual measurements.

In 1991, U.S. Pat. No. 5,055,851 to Sheffer filed Nov. 29, 1989 taught that if three or more relationships have been established in a triangular space of three or more base stations (BSs) with a location database constructed having data related to possible mobile station (MS) locations, then arculation calculations may be performed, which use three distinct P_(or) measurements to determine an X,Y, two dimensional location, which can then be projected onto an area map. The triangulation calculation is based on the fact that the approximate distance of the mobile station (MS) from any base station (BS) cell can be calculated based on the received signal strength. Sheffer acknowledges that terrain variations affect accuracy, although as noted above, Sheffer's disclosure does not account for a sufficient number of variables, such as fixed and variable location shadow fading, which are typical in dense urban areas with moving traffic.

Most field research before about 1988 has focused on characterizing (with the objective of RF coverage prediction) the RF propagation channel (i.e., electromagnetic radio waves) using a single-ray model, although standard fit errors in regressions proved dismal (e.g., 40-80 dB). Later, multi-ray models were proposed, and much later, certain behaviors were studied with radio and digital channels. In 1981, Vogler proposed that radio waves at higher frequencies could be modeled using optics principles. In 1988 Walfisch and Bertoni applied optical methods to develop a two-ray model, which when compared to certain highly specific, controlled field data, provided extremely good regression fit standard errors of within 1.2 dB.

In the Bertoni two ray model it was assumed that most cities would consist of a core of high-rise buildings surrounded by a much larger area having buildings of uniform height spread over regions comprising many square blocks, with street grids organizing buildings into rows that are nearly parallel. Rays penetrating buildings then emanating outside a building were neglected.

After a lengthy analysis it was concluded that path loss was a function of three factors: 1.) the path loss between antennas in free space; 2.) the reduction of rooftop wave fields due to settling; and 3.) the effect of diffraction of the rooftop fields down to ground level.

However, a substantial difficulty with the two-ray model in practice is that it requires a substantial amount of data regarding building dimensions, geometry, street widths, antenna gain characteristics for every possible ray path, etc. Additionally, it requires an inordinate amount of computational resources and such a model is not easily updated or maintained.

Unfortunately, in practice clutter geometry and building heights are random. Moreover, data of sufficient detail is extremely difficult to acquire, and regression standard fit errors are poor; i.e., in the general case, these errors were found to be 40-60 dB. Thus the two-ray model approach, although sometimes providing an improvement over single ray techniques, still did not predict RF signal characteristics in the general case to level of accuracy desired (<10 dB).

Work by Greenstein has since developed from the perspective of measurement-based regression models, as opposed to the previous approach of predicting-first, then performing measurement comparisons. Apparently yielding to the fact that low-power, low antenna (e.g., 12-25 feet above ground) height PCS microcell coverage was insufficient in urban buildings, Greenstein, et al, authored “Performance Evaluations for Urban Line-of-sight Microcells Using a Multi-ray Propagation Model”, in IEEE Globecom Proceedings, 12/91. This paper proposed the idea of formulating regressions based on field measurements using small PCS microcells in a lineal microcell geometry (i.e., geometries in which there is always a line-of-sight path between a subscriber's mobile and its current microsite). Additionally, Greenstein studied the communication channels variable Bit-Error-Rate (BER) in a spatial domain, which was a departure from previous research that limited field measurements to the RF propagation channel signal strength alone. However, Greenstein based his finding on two suspicious assumptions: 1) he assumed that distance correlation estimates were identical for uplink and downlink transmission paths; and 2) modulation techniques would be transparent in terms of improved distance correlation conclusions. Although some data held very correlation, other data and environments produced poor results. Accordingly, his results appear unreliable for use in general location context.

In 1993 Greenstein, et al, authored “A Measurement-Based Model for Predicting Coverage Areas of Urban Microcells”, in the IEEE Journal On Selected Areas in Communications, Vol. 11, No. 7, 9/93. Greenstein reported a generic measurement-based model of RF attenuation in terms of constant-value contours surrounding a given low-power, low antenna microcell environment in a dense, rectilinear neighborhood, such as New York City. However, these contours were for the cellular frequency band. In this case, LOS and non-LOS clutter were considered for a given microcell site. A result of this analysis was that RF propagation losses (or attenuation), when cell antenna heights were relatively low, provided attenuation contours resembling a spline plane curve depicted as an asteroid, aligned with major street grid patterns. Further, Greenstein found that convex diamond-shaped RF propagation loss contours were a common occurrence in field measurements in a rectilinear urban area. The special plane curve asteroid is represented by the formula:

x^(2/3)+y^(2/3)=r^(2/3). However, these results alone have not been sufficiently robust and general to accurately locate a mobile station, due to the variable nature of urban clutter spatial arrangements.

At Telesis Technology in 1994 Howard Xia, et al, authored “Microcellular Propagation Characteristics for Personal Communications in Urban and Suburban Environments”, in IEEE Transactions of Vehicular Technology, Vol. 43, No. 3, 8/94, which performed measurements specifically in the PCS 1.8 to 1.9 GHz frequency band. Xia found corresponding but more variable outcome results in San Francisco, Oakland (urban) and the Sunset and Mission Districts (suburban).

The physical radio propagation channel perturbs signal strength, frequency (causing rate changes, phase delay, signal to noise ratios (e.g., C/I for the analog case, or E_(b/No), RF energy per bit, over average noise density ratio for the digital case) and Doppler-shift. Signal strength is usually characterized by:

-   -   Free Space Path Loss (L_(p))     -   Slow fading loss or margin (L_(slow))     -   Fast fading loss or margin (L_(fast))

The cell designer increases the transmitted power P_(TX) by the shadow fading margin L_(slow) which is usually chosen to be within the 1-2 percentile of the slow fading probability density function (PDF) to minimize the probability of unsatisfactorily low received power level P_(RX) at the receiver. The P_(RX) level must have enough signal to noise energy level (e.g., 10 dB) to overcome the receivers internal noise level (e.g., −118 dBm in the case of cellular 0.9 GHz), for a minimum voice quality standard. Thus in this example P_(RX) must never be below −108 dBm, in order to maintain the quality standard.

Additionally the short term fast signal fading due to multipath propagation is taken into account by deploying fast fading margin L_(fast), which is typically also chosen to be a few percentiles of the fast fading distribution. The 1 to 2 percentiles compliment other network blockage guidelines. For example the cell base station traffic loading capacity and network transport facilities are usually designed for a 1-2 percentile blockage factor as well. However, in the worst-case scenario both fading margins are simultaneously exceeded, thus causing a fading margin overload.

In Roy Steele's, text, Mobile Radio Communications, IEEE Press, 1992, estimates for a GSM system operating in the 1.8 GHz band with a transmitter antenna height of 6.4 m and a mobile station receiver antenna height of 2 m, and assumptions regarding total path loss, transmitter power would be calculated as follows:

TABLE 1 GSM Power Budget Example Parameter dBm value Will require L_(slow) 14 L_(fast) 7 LI_(path) 110 Min. RX pwr required −104 TXpwr = 27 dBm

Steele's sample size in a specific urban London area of 80,000 LOS measurements and data reduction found a slow fading variance of

σ=7 dB

assuming log-normal slow fading PDF and allowing for a 1.4% slow fading margin overload, thus

L_(slow)=2σ=14 dB

The fast fading margin was determined to be:

L_(fast)=7 dB

In contrast, Xia's measurements in urban and suburban California at 1.8 GHz uncovered flat-land shadow fades on the order of 25-30 dB when the mobile station (MS) receiver was traveling from LOS to non-LOS geometries. In hilly terrain fades of +5 to −50 dB were experienced. Thus it is evident that attempts to correlate signal strength with mobile station ranging distance suggest that error ranges could not be expected to improve below 14 dB, with a high side of 25 to 50 dB. Based on 20 to 40 dB per decade, corresponding error ranges for the distance variable would then be on the order of 900 feet to several thousand feet, depending upon the particular environmental topology and the transmitter and receiver geometries.

Although the acceptance of fuzzy logic has been generally more rapid in non-American countries, the principles of fuzzy logic can be applied in wireless location. Lotfi A. Zadeh's article, “Fuzzy Sets” published in 1965 in Information and Control, vol. 8, Pg 338-353, herein incorporated by reference, established the basic principles of fuzzy logic, among which a key theorem, the FAT theorem, suggests that a fuzzy system with a finite set of rules can uniformly approximate any continuous (or Borel-measureable) system. The system has a graph or curve in the space of all combinations of system inputs and outputs. Each fuzzy rule defines a patch in this space. The more uncertain the rule, the wider the patch. A finite number of small patches can always cover the curve. The fuzzy system averages patches that overlap. The Fat theorem was proven by Bart Kosko, in a paper entitled, “Fuzzy Systems as Universal Approximators”, in Proceedings of the First IEEE Conference on Fuzzy Systems, Pages 1153-1162, in San Diego, on March, 1992, herein incorporated by reference.

Fuzzy relations map elements of one universe, say “X”, to those of another universe, say “Y”, through the Cartesian product of the two universes. However, the “strength” of the relation between ordered pairs of the two universes is not measured with the characteristic function (in which an element is either definitely related to another element as indicated by a strength value of “1”, or is definitely not related to another element as indicated by a strength value of “0”, but rather with a membership function expressing various “degrees” of strength of the relation on the unit interval [0,1]. Hence, a fuzzy relation R is a mapping from the Cartesian space X×Y to the interval [0,1], where the strength of the mapping is expressed by the membership function of the relation for ordered pairs from the two universes or μ_(R)(x,y).

Just as for crisp relations, the properties of commutativity, associativity, distributivity, involution and idempotency all hold for fuzzy relations. Moreover, DeMorgan's laws hold for fuzzy relations just as they do for crisp (classical) relations, and the null relations O, and the complete relation, E, are analogous to the null set and the whole set in set-theoretic from, respectively. The properties that do not hold for fuzzy relations, as is the case for fuzzy sets in general, are the excluded middle laws. Since a fuzzy relation R is also a fuzzy set, there is overlap between a relation and its complement, hence. R∪R′≠E R∩R′≠O

As seen in the foregoing expression, the excluded middle laws for relation do not result in the null relation, O, or the complete relation, E. Because fuzzy relations in general are fuzzy sets, the Cartesian product can be defined as a relations between two or more fuzzy sets. Let A be a fuzzy set or universe X and B be a fuzzy set on universe Y; then the Cartesian product between fuzzy sets A and B will result in a fuzzy relation R, which is contained within the full Cartesian product space, or A×B=R⊂X×Y

where the fuzzy relation R has membership function: μ_(R)(x,y)=μ_(A×B)(x,y)=min(μ_(A)(x),μ_(B)(y))

Fuzzy composition can be defined just as it is for crisp (binary) relations. If R is a fuzzy relation on the Cartesian space X×Y, and S is a fuzzy relation on the Cartesian space Y×Z, and T is a fuzzy relation on the Cartesian space X×Z; then fuzzy max-min composition is defined in terms of the set-theoretic notation and membership function-theoretic notation in the following manner: μ_(T)(x,y)=

(μ_(R)(x,y)

μ_(S)(x,y))=max{min[μ_(R)(x,y),μ_(S)(y,z)]}

The fuzzy extension principle allows for transforms or mappings of fuzzy concepts in the form y=f(x). This principle, combined with a compositional rule of inference, allows for a crisp input to be mapped through a fuzzy transform using membership functions into a crisp output. Additionally, in mapping a variable x into a variable y, both x and y can be vector quantities.

TERMS

The following definitions are provided for convenience. In general, the definitions here are also defined elsewhere in this document as well.

(1) The term wireless herein is, in general, an abbreviation for digital wireless, and in particular (but without limitation), wireless refers to digital radio signaling using one of standard digital protocols such as CDMA, TDMA, GSM, GPRS, as well as various other protocols such as those for WIFI and indoor wireless systems as one skilled in the art will understand, (2) As used herein, the term mobile station (equivalently, MS) refers to a wireless device that is at least a transmitting device, and in most cases is also a wireless receiving device, such as a portable radio telephony handset. Note that in some contexts herein instead or in addition to mobile station, the following terms are also used: mobile device, mobile unit, personal station (PS), and location unit (LU). In general, these terms may be considered synonymous. However, the latter two terms may be used when referring to reduced functionality communication devices in comparison to a typical digital wireless mobile telephone. (3) The term, infrastructure, denotes, in at least some embodiments, network of telephony communication services, and more particularly, that portion of such a network that receives and processes wireless communications with wireless mobile stations. In particular, an infrastructure may include network equipment such as telephony wireless base stations, access points or units, and/or other devices for communication with mobile stations, wherein such equipment may be based on protocols such as CDMA, TDMA, GSM, GPRS, as well as various other protocols such as those for WIFI and indoor wireless systems as one skilled in the art will understand, wherein such network equipment may provide cooperative wireless communication channels with the mobile station. Moreover, to simplify the description herein, to the extent possible, the term “base station”, and/or “BS” is used herein to denote any/all of the above listed network equipment. Thus, an MS user within an area serviced by the base stations may be provided with wireless communication throughout the area by user transparent communication transfers (i.e., hand-offs) between the users mobile station and these base stations in order to maintain effective communication service (e.g., voice service, or data service). Moreover, for at least many wireless systems, a mobile switch center provides communications and control connectivity among base stations. (4) An example of a Parametric-driven intelligent agent-based location service follows: An intelligent agent software process monitors sets of Parametric conditions and location scenarios. When appropriate conditions and location criteria are satisfied, then a set of notifications or other actions are triggered to occur. A specific example follows: given that a certain child carrying a mobile station should be in a certain school between 8:00 A.M. and 3:00 P.M. on regular school days, then a wireless location request is invoked periodically, within the school day time frame. If a location request determines that the child's mobile station is located substantially outside of the general school area, then a parent/guardian is notified of that fact, and of the child's location via any of several methods, such as: (a.) a voice-synthesized telephone message, (b.) various extranet/internet means, such as electronic mail, netcasting, such as the product Castanet, by Marimba Software, Inc., (c.) fax to a pre-determined telephone number, or (d.) alpha-numeric text paging. (5) A commercial mobile radio service provider (CMRS) is the referenced name of a company that owns and/or operates a publicly accessible wireless system in the cellular or PCS spectrum radio bands. (6) The term “geolocation” as used herein refers to “a representation of at least one of: a geographical location or a geographical extent”. Thus, the term “GeoLocation Message” refers to a message that contains a content representative of at least one of: a geographical location or a geographical extent. Moreover, the term “geolocation result” refers to a result that represents at least one of: a geographical location or a geographical extent, and the term “geolocation related processing” is intended to mean “processing that is related to a result that represents at least one of: a geographical location or a geographical extent”.

SUMMARY

It is an aspect of the present disclosure to describe a system and method for determining wireless location using one or more commercial mobile radio telecommunication systems for accurately locating people and/or objects in a cost effective manner. Related aspects for the present disclosure include providing a system and method that:

(1) can be readily incorporated into existing commercial wireless telephony systems with few, if any, modifications of a typical telephony wireless infrastructure;

(2) can use the native electronics of typical commercially available telephony wireless mobile stations (e.g., handsets) as location devices;

(3) can be used for locating people and/or objects residing indoors.

Yet another aspect is to provide a low cost location system and method, adaptable to wireless telephony systems, for using simultaneously a plurality of base stations owned and/or operated by competing commercial mobile radio service providers within a common radio coverage area, in order to achieve FCC phase 2 or other accuracy requirements, and for synergistically increasing mobile station location accuracy and consistency.

Yet another aspect is to provide a low cost location system and method, adaptable to wireless telephony systems, for using a plurality of location techniques In particular, at least some of the following mobile station location techniques can be utilized by various embodiments of the present disclosure:

(4.1) time-of-arrival wireless signal processing techniques;

(4.2) time-difference-of-arrival wireless signal processing techniques;

(4.3) adaptive wireless signal processing techniques having, for example, learning capabilities and including, for instance, neural net and genetic algorithm processing;

(4.4) signal processing techniques for matching MS location signals with wireless signal characteristics of known areas;

(4.5) conflict resolution techniques for resolving conflicts in hypotheses for MS location estimates;

(4.6) enhancement of MS location estimates through the use of both heuristics and historical data associating MS wireless signal characteristics with known locations and/or environmental conditions.

Yet another aspect is to provide a system and method for flexible delivery of location information to Public Safety Answering Points, end users, centralized dispatchers, as well as to agents (either human or mechanized) associated with trigger-based inventory and tracking systems. Flexible delivery used here indicates providing location via various two dimensional closed-form shapes, such as polygons, ellipses, etc., which bound the location probabilities. In cases where height location information is known, the bounding shape may be three-dimensional.

Yet another aspect is to provide a system and method for a variety of new location-based services for public and private group safety, including family support functions.

Yet another aspect is to provide a system and method for National Scale Wireless Location capability. Although the primary focus of this patent is to provide wireless location with accuracy to meet the FCC phase two requirements, a system and method is provided that also utilizes roaming signaling to determine in which city is a particular wireless mobile station located.

Yet another aspect is to provide a system and method for Parametric-driven, intelligent agent-based location services. Parameters may include time, location, and user-specific and/or group specific criteria.

Yet another aspect is to provide a system and method for determining and/or enhancing wireless location using one or more of the following: (a.) CDMA-based Distributed Antenna technology; (b.) Home Base Stations and AIN technology.

Yet another aspect is to provide notification messages and/or voice-synthesized call or text paging function to a plurality of other mobile station users when a mobile station user travels into, or away from, one or more zones or is within short distances of shopping malls, stores, merchandising dealers etc. as described in the Section titled “Selective Group, Multicast, Individualized Directions Conferencing Application.”

Yet another aspect is to provide notification messages and/or voice-synthesized call or text paging functions to a plurality of other mobile station users when a mobile station dials a predefined telephone number, such as 911, or a type of “mild emergency cry for help’ number.

Yet another aspect is to provide notification messages and/or voice-synthesized call or text paging function to a plurality of other mobile station users when a mobile station user dials a predefined telephone number, such as 311, or a type of mild emergency cry for help number, wherein the plurality of other mobile station users are within a particular distance, or a minimum distance to the mobile station user who dialed the predefined number.

Yet another aspect is to provide notification messages and/or voice-synthesized call or text paging function to a plurality of other mobile station users when a mobile station user dials a predefined telephone number, such as 311, or a type of mild emergency cry for help number, wherein the plurality of other mobile station users are within a particular distance, or a minimum distance to the mobile station user who dialed the predefined number, and wherein the other mobile station users are provided individualized directional or navigation information from their current locations, to reach to the mobile station user who dialed the predefined number.

Yet another aspect is to provide automatic home office, vehicle and boat security functions, which are activated and deactivated based on a mobile station users location to or away from a location associated with the security functions.

Yet another aspect is to provide notifications (e.g., via fax, page, e-mail, text paging or voice synthesized call message), or to setup a group conference call capability to a plurality of predefined individuals, based on a mobile station users call to 911, or based on a mobile station users traveling into or away from a location zone or area, or based upon a sensor input signal to the users mobile station, such as a sudden change in G forces, such as falling down, having the car hit another object suddenly, air bag deployment, etc.

Yet another aspect is to provide location information to a ‘searcher’ mobile station user who then further refines or narrows the scope of the location/search for a ‘target’ mobile station, or the mobile station to be located, using a small microwave dish, in communication with, or to supplement/replace the searcher mobile station antenna, whose physical orientation is used to further determine the target mobile station location, relative to the searchers mobile station position/orientation.

Yet another aspect is to provide a means to allow more flexible storage, inventory and enhanced user accessibility of rental vehicles, by combining location technology of rental car driver carrying his/her own mobile station, along with a mobile station which remains always active and fixed to a rental car. By maintaining accurate location records of rental car locations and automatic, remote-control of rental cars (or smart cars) which use the mobile station to telemeter control data to and from the car, whose doors, door locks, and general accessibility are controlled by a centralized computer system, rental cars can be dropped off at convenient shopping center malls, airport parking lots, hotels and at other convenient locations.

Yet another aspect is to provide location estimates to users carrying mobile stations, via voice synthesis, data circuit messaging or text paging.

Yet another aspect is to provide a mechanism whereby mobile station users may access and control their subscriber profile for location purposes. The location subscriber profile is a persistent data store which contains logic regarding under what criteria will that mobile station user allow his/her location to be made known, and to whom. The mobile station user may access the location profile via several methods, including Internet means, and mobile station handset keypad entry and voice recognition circuits.

Yet another aspect is to utilize signaling detection characteristics of other CDMA base stations and systems in a given area, owned and operated by another commercial mobile radio service provider (CMRS provider). By including other CMRS providers' infrastructure in the location estimation analysis process, improvements in location accuracy can be realized.

In one embodiment, the location system of the present disclosure accomplishes the above and other aspects by the following steps:

(1) receiving signal data measurements corresponding to wireless communications between a mobile station to be located (herein also denoted the target mobile station) and a wireless telephony infrastructure, wherein the mobile station, MS and/or mobile switch center may be enhanced in certain novel and cost effective ways so as to provide an extended number of values characterizing the wireless signal communications between the target mobile station and the base station infrastructure, such infrastructure including multiple, distinct CMRS where base stations share a common coverage area;

(2) organizing and processing the signal data measurements received from a given target mobile station and surrounding base stations so that composite wireless signal characteristic values may be obtained from which target mobile station location estimates may be derived. In particular, the signal data measurements are ensembles of samples from the wireless signals received from the target mobile station by the base station infrastructure, and from associated base stations wherein these samples are subsequently filtered using analog and digital spectral filtering.

(3) providing the resultant location estimation characteristic values to a mobile station location estimate model, wherein each such model (also denoted a “first order model” or FOM) subsequently determines the estimate of the location of the target mobile station based on, for example, the signal processing techniques (1) through (2) above.

Accordingly, steps (1) and (2) above are performed by a subsystem of the disclosure denoted the Signal Processing and Filtering Subsystem (or simply the Signal Processing Subsystem). In particular, this subsystem receives samples of wireless signal characteristic measurements such as a plurality of relative signal strengths and corresponding signal time delay value pairs, wherein such samples are used by this subsystem to produce the component with the least amount of multipath, as evidenced in the sample by the short time delay value, wherein each such value pair is associated with wireless signal transmissions between the target mobile station and a particular base station of a predetermined wireless base station infrastructure. Extremely transient signal anomalies such as signal reflection from tree leaves or the passing of a truck are likely to be filtered out by the Signal Processing Subsystem. For example, such an ensemble of data value pairs can be subjected to input cropping and various median filters employing filtering techniques such as convolution, median digital, Fast Fourier transform, Radon transform, Gabar transform, nearest neighbor, histogram equalization, input and output cropping, Sobel, Wiener, and the like. It is a further aspect of the present disclosure that the wireless personal communication system (PCS) infrastructures currently being developed by telecommunication providers offer an appropriate localized infrastructure based upon which to build various personal location systems employing the present disclosure and/or utilizing the techniques disclosed herein. In particular, the present disclosure is especially suitable for the location of people and/or objects using code division multiple access (CDMA) wireless infrastructures, although other wireless infrastructures, such as, time division multiple access (TDMA) infrastructures and GSM are also contemplated. Note that CDMA personal communications systems are described in the Telephone Industries Association standard IS-95, for frequencies below 1 GHz, and in the Wideband Spread—Spectrum Digital Cellular System Dual-Mode Mobile Station-Base Station Compatibility Standard, for frequencies in the 1.8-1.9 GHz frequency bands, both of which are incorporated herein by reference. Furthermore, CDMA general principles have also been described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,109,390, to Gilhousen, et al filed Nov. 7, 1989, and CDMA Network Engineering Handbook by Qualcomm, Inc., each of which is also incorporated herein by reference.

In another aspect of the present disclosure, in environments where a home base station capability exists, then wireless location can be provided under certain circumstances, wherein when a mobile station user is within a predetermined range of, for example, 1000 feet of his/her premises, the user's mobile station is detected through mobile station receiving electronics provided in, for example, cordless telephone units as being at home. Thus, the local public telephone switching network may be provided with such information for registering that user is at home, and therefore the mobile station may be allowed to function as a cordless home telephone utilizing the local public telephone switching network instead of the base station infrastructure. According to this aspect of the present disclosure, the location center of the present disclosure receives notification from the local public switched telephone network that the mobile station is at or near home and utilizes this notification in outputting a location estimate for the mobile station.

For example, in one embodiment, the present disclosure describes low cost, low power base stations, denoted location base stations (LBS) above, providing, for example, CDMA pilot channels to a very limited area about each such LBS. The location base stations may provide limited voice traffic capabilities, but each is capable of gathering sufficient wireless signal characteristics from an MS within the location base station's range to facilitate locating the MS. Thus, by positioning the location base stations at known locations in a geographic region such as, for instance, on street lamp poles and road signs, additional MS location accuracy can be obtained. That is, due to the low power signal output by such location base stations, for there to be communication between a location base station and a target MS, the MS must be relatively near the location base station. Additionally, for each location base station not in communication with the target MS, it is likely that the MS is not near to this location base station. Thus, by utilizing information received from both location base stations in communication with the target MS and those that are not in communication with the target MS, an embodiment of the present disclosure can substantially narrow the possible geographic areas within which the target MS is likely to be. Further, by providing each location base station (LBS) with a co-located stationary wireless transceiver (denoted a built-in MS above) having similar functionality to an MS, the following advantages are provided:

(4.1) assuming that the co-located base station capabilities and the stationary transceiver of an LBS are such that the base station capabilities and the stationary transceiver communicate with one another, the stationary transceiver can be signaled by another component(s) of the present disclosure to activate or deactivate its associated base station capability, thereby conserving power for the LBS that operate on a restricted power such as solar electrical power;

(4.2) the stationary transceiver of an LBS can be used for transferring target MS location information obtained by the LBS to a conventional telephony base station;

(4.3) since the location of each LBS is known and can be used in location processing, an embodiment of the present disclosure is able to (re)train and/or (re)calibrate itself in geographical areas having such LBSs. That is, by activating each LBS stationary transceiver so that there is signal communication between the stationary transceiver and surrounding base stations within range, wireless signal characteristic values for the location of the stationary transceiver are obtained for each such base station.

A novel aspect of the present disclosure relies on the discovery that in many areas where MS location services are desired, the wireless signal measurements obtained from communications between the target MS and the base station infrastructure are extensive enough to provide sufficiently unique or peculiar values so that the pattern of values alone may identify the location of the target MS. Further, assuming a sufficient amount of such location identifying pattern information is captured in the composite wireless signal characteristic values for a target MS, and that there is a technique for matching such wireless signal patterns to geographical locations, then a FOM based on this technique may generate a reasonably accurate target MS location estimate. Moreover, if the present disclosure (e.g., the Location Signature Data Base) has captured sufficient wireless signal data from location communications between MSs and the base station infrastructure wherein the locations of the MSs are also verified and captured, then this captured data (e.g., location signatures) can be used to train or calibrate such models to associate the location of a target MS with the distinctive signal characteristics between the target MS and one or more base stations. Accordingly, the present disclosure includes one or more FOMs that may be generally denoted as classification models wherein such FOMs are trained or calibrated to associate particular composite wireless signal characteristic values with a geographical location where a target MS could likely generate the wireless signal samples from which the composite wireless signal characteristic values are derived. Further, the present disclosure includes the capability for training (calibrating) and retraining (recalibrating) such classification FOMs to automatically maintain the accuracy of these models even though substantial changes to the radio coverage area may occur, such as the construction of a new high rise building or seasonal variations (due to, for example, foliage variations).

Note that such classification FOMs that are trained or calibrated to identify target MS locations by the wireless signal patterns produced constitute a particularly novel aspect of the present disclosure. It is well known in the wireless telephony art that the phenomenon of signal multipath renders most analytical location computational techniques such as time-of-arrival (TOA) or time-difference-of-arrival (TDOA) substantially useless in urban areas and particularly in dense urban areas. However, this same multipath phenomenon also may produce substantially distinct or peculiar signal measurement patterns, wherein such a pattern coincides with a relatively small geographical area. Thus, the present invention utilizes multipath as an advantage for increasing accuracy where for previous location systems multipath has been a source of substantial inaccuracies. Moreover, it is worthwhile to note that the utilization of classification FOMs in high multipath environments is especially advantageous in that high multipath environments are typically densely populated. Thus, since such environments are also capable of yielding a greater density of MS location signal data from MSs whose actual locations can be obtained, there can be a substantial amount of training or calibration data captured by the present disclosure for training or calibrating such classification FOMs and for progressively improving the MS location accuracy of such models. Moreover, since it is also a related aspect of the present disclosure to include a plurality stationary, low cost, low power “location detection base stations” (LBS), each having both restricted range MS detection capabilities and a built-in MS, a grid of such LBSs can be utilized for providing location signal data (from the built-in MS) for (re)training or (re)calibrating such classification FOMs.

In one embodiment of the present disclosure, one or more classification FOMs may each include a learning module such as a neural network for associating target MS location signal data with a target MS location estimate. Additionally, one or more classification FOMs may be statistical prediction models based on such statistical techniques as, for example, principle decomposition, partial least squares, or other regression techniques.

Another aspect, the present disclosure provides a capability for locating a target mobile station within areas of poor reception for infrastructure base stations by utilizing distributed antennas. A distributed antenna system as used herein is a collection of antennas attached in series to a reduced function base station, wherein the antennas are distributed throughout an area for improving telephony coverage. Such distributed antenna systems are typically used in indoor environments (e.g., high rise buildings) or other areas wherein the signal to noise ratio is too high for adequate communication with standard infrastructure base stations. Also a distributed antenna system may be located such that its coverage pattern overlaps the area of coverage of another distributed antenna system. In such cases each of the overlapping distributed antenna systems includes purposeful delay elements to provide different signal delays for each of the overlapping antenna systems and thereby provide multipath signals with sufficient delay spread for signal discrimination, as one skilled in the art will understand. Accordingly, an embodiment of the present disclosure receives and utilizes location information communicated from distributed antenna systems for locating a target mobile station. That is, an embodiment of the present disclosure may receive information from the base station infrastructure indicating that a target mobile station is communicating with such a distributed antenna system and provide distributed antenna signal characteristic values related to the distributed antenna system. Accordingly, to process such target mobile station location signal data, an embodiment of the present disclosure includes a distributed antenna system for generating target mobile station location estimate derived from the location signal data obtained from the distributed antenna system.

The location system of an embodiment of the present disclosure offers many advantages over existing location systems. The system of an embodiment of the present disclosure, for example, is readily adaptable to existing wireless communication systems and can accurately locate people and/or objects in a cost-effective manner. In particular, an embodiment of the present disclosure requires few, if any, modifications to commercial wireless communication systems for implementation. Thus, existing personal communication system infrastructure base stations and other components of, for example, commercial CDMA infrastructures are readily adapted to an embodiment of the present disclosure. An embodiment of the present disclosure can be used to locate people and/or objects that are not in the line-of-sight of a wireless receiver or transmitter, can reduce the detrimental effects of multipath on the accuracy of the location estimate, can locate people and/or objects located indoors as well as outdoors, and uses a number of wireless stationary transceivers for location. An embodiment of the present disclosure employs a number of distinctly different location computational models (FOMs) for location which provides a greater degree of accuracy, robustness and versatility than is possible with existing systems. For instance, the location models provided include not only the radius-radius/TOA and TDOA techniques but also adaptive neural net techniques (e.g., the “N/N Model” of FIG. 49(1) identifies an artificial neural network FOM). Further, an embodiment of the present disclosure is able to adapt to the topography of an area in which location service is desired. An embodiment of the present disclosure is also able to adapt to environmental changes substantially as frequently as desired. Thus, an embodiment of the present disclosure is able to take into account changes in the location topography over time without extensive manual data manipulation.

Moreover, there are numerous additional advantages of the system of an embodiment of the present disclosure when applied in CDMA communication systems. The location system of an embodiment of the present disclosure readily benefits from the distinct advantages of the CDMA spread spectrum scheme, namely the exploitation of radio frequency spectral efficiency and isolation by (a) monitoring voice activity, (b) management of two-way power control, (c) provision of advanced variable-rate modems and error correcting signal encoding, (d) inherent resistance to fading, (e) enhanced privacy, and (f) multiple “rake” digital data receivers and searcher receivers for correlation of signal multipaths.

Additionally, note that this architecture need not have all modules co-located. In particular, it is an additional aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure that various modules can be remotely located from one another and communicate with one another via telecommunication transmissions such as telephony technologies and/or the Internet. Accordingly, an embodiment of the present disclosure is particularly adaptable to such distributed computing environments. For example, some number of the location center modules may reside in remote locations and communicate their generated hypotheses of mobile station location estimates (each such hypothesis also denoted a “location hypothesis” herein) via the Internet.

In one embodiment of the present disclosure, the processing following the generation of location estimates by the modules may be such that this processing can be provided on lnthrnet user nodes and the modules may reside at Internet server sites. In this configuration, an Internet user may request hypotheses from such remote modules and perform the remaining processing at his/her node.

Additionally, note that it is within the scope of the present disclosure to provide one or more central location development sites that may be networked to, for example, dispersed location centers or systems providing location services according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, wherein the modules may be accessed, substituted, enhanced or removed dynamically via network connections with a central location development site. Thus, a small but rapidly growing municipality in substantially flat low density area might initially be provided with access to, for example, two or three modules for generating location hypotheses in the municipality's relatively uncluttered radio signaling environment. However, as the population density increases and the radio signaling environment becomes cluttered by, for example, thermal noise and multipath, additional or alternative modules may be transferred via the network to the location center for the municipality.

Of course, other software architectures may also to used in implementing the processing of the location center without departing from scope of the present disclosure. In particular, object-oriented architectures are also within the scope of the present disclosure. For example, the modules may be object methods on an mobile station location estimator object, wherein the estimator object receives substantially all target mobile station location signal data output by the signal filtering subsystem 20. Alternatively, software bus architectures are contemplated by the present disclosure, as one skilled in the art will understand, wherein the software architecture may be modular and facilitate parallel processing.

One embodiment of the present disclosure includes providing the location of a mobile station (MS) using the digital air interface voice channel and an automatic call distributor device. This embodiment provides location information to either the initiating caller who wishes to learn of his location, using the voice channel, and/or location information could be provided to another individual who has either a wireline or wireless telephone station.

Another embodiment of the present disclosure includes providing the location of a mobile station using the digital air interface voice channel and a hunt group provided from a central office or similar device. This embodiment provides location information to either the initiating caller who wishes to learn of his location, using the voice channel, and/or location information could be provided to another individual who has either a wireline or wireless telephone station.

Another embodiment of the present disclosure includes providing the location of a mobile station using the digital air interface text paging, or short message service channel and a hunt group provided from a central office or similar device. This embodiment provides location information to either the initiating caller who wishes to learn of his location, using the voice channel, and/or location information could be provided to another individual who has either a wireline or wireless telephone station.

Another embodiment of the present disclosure includes providing the location of a plurality of mobile stations using the public Internet or an intranet, with either having the ability to further use “push”, or “netcasting” technology. This embodiment provides location information to either the initiating Internet or Intranet user who wishes to learn of one or more mobile station locations, using either the Internet or an intranet. Either the mobile station user to be located can initiate a request for the user to be located, or an Internet/Intranet user may initiate the location request. Optionally the location information could be provided autonomously, or periodically, or in accordance with other logic criteria, to the recipient of the location information via the Internet or a intranet. As a further option, location information can be superimposed onto various maps (e.g., bit/raster, vector, digital photograph, etc.) for convenient display to the user.

Yet another embodiment of the present disclosure includes providing a multicast notification to a group of mobile station users, based on a distress call from a particular mobile station, wherein the group of mobile station users are relatively nearby the distressed caller. The multicast notification provides individual directions for each group mobile station user, to direct each user to the fastest route to reach the distressed caller.

Other aspects of the present disclosure can be described as follows:

-   Aspect 1. An apparatus for locating a first mobile station for at     least transmitting and receiving radio signals, wherein said radio     signals are received on a forward radio bandwidth and said radio     signals are transmitted on a different reverse radio bandwidth,     comprising:     -   a first wireless network infrastructure for communicating with         said first mobile station, said first wireless network         infrastructure having:         -   (A1) a plurality of spaced apart base stations for             communicating via said radio signals with said first mobile             station, and         -   (A2) a mobile switching center for communicating with said             first mobile station, via said radio signals with the base             stations, wherein said mobile switching center also             communicates with said plurality of base stations for             receiving measurements of said radio signals, said             measurements including: (i) first measurements of said radio             signals received by said first mobile station in said             forward radio bandwidth, and (ii) second measurements of             said radio signals transmitted by said first mobile station             in said reverse radio bandwidth;     -   a location determining means for locating said first mobile         station, wherein said location determining means receives said         first and second measurements from the mobile switching center         for estimating a location of said first mobile station, wherein         said estimate is a function of both said first measurements and         said second measurements. -   Aspect 2. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect 1,     further including an interface means between said location     determining means and said mobile switching center, wherein said     interface means generates a location request for a primary one of     said base stations to which said first mobile signaling means is in     communication. -   Aspect 3. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect 1,     further including a means for requesting data related to additional     radio signals between said first mobile station and at least a     second wireless network infrastructure different from said first     wireless network infrastructure. -   Aspect 4. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect 1,     wherein said first wireless network infrastructure is capable of     communicating at least one of voice and visual information with said     first mobile station. -   Aspect 5. An apparatus for locating a mobile station, comprising:     -   a wireless network infrastructure for communicating with a         plurality of mobile stations, each said mobile station for         transmitting and receiving wireless signals, wherein said         wireless signals are received in a forward bandwidth and said         wireless signals are transmitted in a different reverse         bandwidth, and, said wireless network infrastructure having a         plurality of spaced apart base stations for communicating via         said wireless signals with said plurality of mobile stations;     -   a location determining means for communicating with said         plurality of mobile stations, via said radio signals with the         base stations, wherein said location determining means         communicates with said plurality of base stations for receiving         measurements related to said radio signals for estimating a         location of at least a first of said plurality of mobile         stations, said measurements including: (i) first measurements of         said wireless signals received by said first mobile station in         said forward radio bandwidth, and (ii) second measurements of         said wireless signals transmitted by said first mobile station         in said reverse radio bandwidth;     -   wherein said location determining means estimates a location of         said first mobile station using both said first measurements and         said second measurements. -   Aspect 6. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect 5,     wherein said second measurements are determined from said wireless     signals being received by said base stations. -   Aspect 7. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect 5,     wherein said measurements include at least one of: a delay spread, a     signal strength, a ratio of energy per bit versus signal to noise, a     word error rate, a frame error rate, a mobile signaling means, a     power control value, a pilot index, a finger identification, an     arrival time, an identification of said first mobile station for     communicating with the wireless network infrastructure, a make of     said first mobile station, a revision of said first mobile station,     a sector identification of one of the base stations receiving said     radio signals transmitted from said first mobile station. -   Aspect 8. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect 5,     wherein said radio signals are communicated using one of: CDMA,     W-CDMA, TDMA, GSM, GPRS, WIFI and advanced mobile phone service. -   Aspect 9. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect 5,     wherein said location determining means includes a location     estimator using time difference of arrival data from said     measurements. -   Aspect 10. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect     9, wherein said location estimator receives said measurements from a     distributed antenna system. -   Aspect 11. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect     9, wherein said location estimator receives active, candidate and     remaining set information from said first mobile signaling means. -   Aspect 12. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect     1, wherein said location determining means includes:     -   a receiving means for receiving first data related to at least         one of said first measurements and said second measurements         between said first mobile station and said wireless network         infrastructure; activating a first location estimator for         outputting a first estimate of a location of said first mobile         station when supplied with location information from said         receiving means, said location information related to the first         data; outputting said first estimate of the location of said         first mobile station when said first estimate has an extent less         than or equal to a predetermined size;     -   activating a second location estimator for outputting a second         estimate of a location of said first mobile station when said         first location estimator does not provide said first estimate         having an extent less than or equal to a predetermined size;     -   outputting an estimate of the location of said first mobile         station when said second location estimator provides said second         estimate. -   Aspect 13. A method for locating a wireless mobile station,     comprising: transmitting, by a first short range transceiver     station, a status change related to whether the mobile station and     said first short range transceiver station are able to wirelessly     communicate through a telephony network to a predetermined storage;     storing, in said predetermined storage, said status of a mobile     station, wherein said status has a first value when the mobile     station communicates with said short range transceiver station as a     cordless telephone, and said status has a second value when the     mobile station communicates with a network of base stations, wherein     said base stations are cooperatively linked for providing wireless     communication; detecting, by said first short range transceiver     station, a change accessing said predetermined storage for     determining a location of the mobile station. -   Aspect 14. A method for locating a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 13, wherein said short range transceiver is a home base     station. -   Aspect 15. A method for locating a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 13, wherein said predetermined storage is accessible via one     of: an autonomous notification message and a request-response     message. -   Aspect 16. A method for locating a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 13, wherein said predetermined storage is a home location     register. -   Aspect 17. A method for locating a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 13, wherein said predetermined storage includes one or more     of the following data items related to said mobile station: mobile     station identification number, short range transceiver     identification and mobile switch center identification. -   Aspect 18. A method for locating a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 13, wherein said step of accessing includes responding to a     query of said predetermined storage location using an identification     of the mobile station. -   Aspect 19. A method for locating a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 13, further including providing said status from said     predetermined storage together with an identification of the mobile     station to a mobile station location estimator for estimating a     location of the mobile station. -   Aspect 20. A method for location a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 17, wherein said step of transmitting further includes     associating said change with a predetermined fixed location and said     short range transceiver identification. -   Aspect 21. A method for location a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 13, wherein said step of accessing includes translating the     mobile identification number and said short range transceiver     identification into a predetermined location when the status has     said first predetermined value. -   Aspect 22. A method for location a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 13, further including a prior step of provisioning a     translating database from a customer tare system containing the     location of the short range transceiver. -   Aspect 23. A method for locating a wireless mobile station,     comprising: receiving data of wireless signals communicated between     a mobile station and a wireless network; detecting, using said first     data, that the mobile station is in wireless communication with a     distributed antenna system having a plurality of antennas connected     in series and distributed along a signal conducting line so that     there is a predetermined signal time delay between said antennas and     at predetermined locations; determining a plurality of signal time     delay measurements for signals transmitted between the mobile     station and a collection of some of said antennas, wherein said     signals are also communicated through said line; estimating a     location of the mobile station using said plurality of signal time     delay measurements. -   Aspect 24. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 23, wherein said step of estimating includes correlating each     measurement of said plurality of signal time delay measurements with     a unique corresponding one of said antennas. -   Aspect 25. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 24, wherein said step of estimating includes: identifying a     plurality of antennas in said collection using correlation obtained     in said step of correlating; determining a corresponding signal time     delay between the mobile station and each antenna in said     collection; determining a location of each antenna in said     collection; estimating a location of the mobile station using said     corresponding signal time delays and said locations of each antenna     in said collection. -   Aspect 26. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 23, wherein said step of estimating includes determining, for     said signal time delay measurements, a common signal time delay     corresponding to transmitting signals from said distributed antenna     system to a receiver of the first wireless network. -   Aspect 27. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 23, wherein said step of estimating includes using an     absolute delay time with respect to a pilot channel for a base     station on the wireless network. -   Aspect 28. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 23, wherein said step of estimating includes performing a     triangulation using values related to one of: a signal time of     arrival, and a signal time difference of arrival for time difference     of arrival corresponding to each antenna in said collection. -   Aspect 29. A method for locating a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 23 wherein said step of estimating includes a step of     computing a most likely location of said mobile station using a     fuzzy logic computation. -   Aspect 30. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 23, wherein said step of activating includes activating one     of:     -   (a) a location estimator for determining whether the mobile         station is detected by a base station of the network, wherein         said base station communicates with the mobile station as a         cordless telephone;     -   (b) a location estimator for estimating a location of the mobile         station using location information obtained from said         distributed antenna system;     -   (c) a location estimator for estimating a location of the mobile         station by one of: triangulation and trilateration. -   Aspect 31. A method for locating a wireless mobile station,     comprising: first receiving first signal characteristic measurements     of wireless signals communicated between a mobile station and a     first network of base stations, wherein said base stations in the     first network are cooperatively linked by a first wireless service     provider for providing wireless communication; instructing the     mobile station to search for a wireless signal from a second network     of base stations that are cooperatively linked by a second wireless     service provider for providing wireless communication, wherein said     first and second wireless service providers are different; second     receiving second signal characteristic measurements of wireless     signals communicated between the mobile station and said second     network of base stations; estimating a location of the mobile     station using said first and second signal characteristic     measurements. -   Aspect 32. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 31, wherein the mobile station is registered for a wireless     communication service with the first wireless service provider, and     the mobile station is not registered for the wireless communication     service with the second wireless service provider. -   Aspect 33. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 31, wherein said step of instructing includes transmitting a     command to the mobile station for instructing the mobile station to     search for a signal from a base station of said second wireless     service provider in a frequency bandwidth different from a frequency     bandwidth for communicating with the base stations of said first     wireless service provider. -   Aspect 34. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 31, wherein said step of instructing includes transmitting a     command to the mobile station for instructing the mobile station to     hand-off from said first service provider to a base station     associated with said second service provider, for purposes of     performing additional signal measurements. -   Aspect 35. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 31, wherein said first signal characteristic measurements     include measurements for time delay, signal strength pairs of signal     communicated from at least one of:     -   (a) the base stations of said first network to the mobile         station, and     -   (b) the mobile station to the base stations of said first         network, and     -   wherein said second signal characteristic measurements include         measurements for time delay, signal strength pairs of signals         communicated from the base stations of said second network to         the mobile station. -   Aspect 36. A method for locating a wireless mobile station,     comprising: receiving first data related to wireless signals     communicated between a mobile station and at least a first network     of a plurality of commercial mobile service provider networks of     base stations, wherein for each said network, there is a plurality     of base stations for at least one of transmitting and receiving     wireless signals with a plurality of mobile stations; instructing     the mobile station to communicate with a second network of the     plurality of networks for supplying second data; activating a mobile     station location estimator, when said first and second data are     obtained for providing an estimate of a location of the mobile     station. -   Aspect 37. A method for locating a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 36, wherein said second network includes a second plurality     of base stations, wherein a majority of base stations in said second     plurality of base stations has a location different from the     locations of base stations in said first network. -   Aspect 38. A method for locating a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 36, wherein at least one of said first and second data     includes signal characteristic measurements of communication with     the mobile station for a time interval of less than 10 seconds. -   Aspect 39. A method for locating a wireless mobile station,     comprising: first receiving first signal characteristic measurements     of wireless signals communicated between a mobile station and a     first network of base stations, wherein said base stations in the     first network are cooperatively linked by a first wireless service     provider for providing wireless communication; instructing a second     network of base stations that are cooperatively linked by a second     wireless service provider for providing wireless communication so     that the second network searches for wireless signals from the     mobile station, wherein said first and second wireless service     providers are different; second receiving second signal     characteristic measurements of wireless signals communicated between     the mobile station and said second network of base stations;     estimating a location of the mobile station using said first and     second signal characteristic measurements. -   Aspect 40. A method for locating a wireless mobile station, as in     Aspect 39, further including a step of requesting the mobile station     to raise it's transmitter power level to a predetermined level,     prior to said step of instructing. -   Aspect 41. A method for locating a wireless mobile station,     comprising: receiving, by a receiving means, first data related to     wireless signals communicated between a mobile station and at least     a first network of a plurality of commercial mobile service provider     networks, wherein for each said network, there are a plurality of     communication stations for at least one of transmitting and     receiving wireless signals with a plurality of mobile stations;     first activating a location estimator for providing a first estimate     of a location of the mobile station when supplied with first     location information from said receiving means, said first location     information related to the first data;     -   when one of: (a) said first estimate does not exist, and (b)         said first estimate has an extent greater than or equal to a         predetermined size, the steps (A1) and (A2) are performed:     -   (A1) instructing the mobile station to communicate with a second         network of the plurality of networks for supplying second data         to said receiving means, wherein said second data is related to         wireless signals communicated between the mobile station and the         second network;     -   (A2) second activating said location estimator a second time for         providing a second estimate of a location of the mobile station         when supplied with additional location information from said         receiving means, said additional location information related to         the second data;     -   outputting at least one of the estimates of the location of the         mobile station provided by said location estimator when said         location estimator provides at least one estimate of the         location of the mobile station. -   Aspect 42. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 41, wherein said additional location information and said     first location information are utilized together by said location     estimator. -   Aspect 43. A method of locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 41, wherein said communication stations include wireless base     stations for one of CDMA, TDMA, GSM, GPRS, and WIFI. -   Aspect 44. A method of locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 43, wherein said communication stations include home base     stations. -   Aspect 45. A method of locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 41, wherein the mobile station includes one of: a CDMA     transmitter, a TDMA transmitter, and a GSM transmitter, and a AMPS     transmitter. -   Aspect 46. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 41, wherein one or more of said activating steps includes:     -   (a) said location estimator for determining whether the mobile         station is detected by a communication station which         communicates with the mobile station as a cordless telephone;     -   (b) said location estimator for estimating a location of the         mobile station using location information related to data from a         distributed antenna system;     -   (c) said location estimator for estimating a location of the         mobile station by one of: triangulation and trilateration. -   Aspect 47. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 41, wherein said predetermined extent is less than one     thousand feet. -   Aspect 48. A method for locating a wireless mobile station,     comprising: receiving, by a receiving means, first data related to     wireless signals communicated between a mobile station and at least     a first network of one or more commercial mobile service provider     networks, wherein for each said network, there is a different     plurality of base stations for at least one of transmitting and     receiving wireless signals with a plurality of mobile stations;     activating a first location estimator for outputting a first     estimate of a location of the mobile station when supplied with     location information from said receiving means, said location     information related to the first data; outputting said first     estimate of the location of the mobile station when said first     estimate has an extent less than or equal to a predetermined size;     activating a second location estimator for outputting a second     estimate of a location of the mobile station when said first     location estimator does not provide said first estimate having an     extent less than or equal to a predetermined size; outputting an     estimate of the location of the mobile station when said second     location estimator provides said second estimate. -   Aspect 49. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 48 further including a step of instructing the mobile station     to communicate with a second network of the plurality of networks     for supplying second data to said receiving means, wherein said     second data is related to wireless signals communicated between the     mobile station and the second network. -   Aspect 50. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 49, wherein said step of instructing includes a step of     instructing the mobile station to hand-off to said second network     for synchronizing timing signals and performing measurements between     the mobile station an said second network. -   Aspect 51. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 48, wherein one or more of said activating steps includes     activating one of:     -   (a) a location estimator for determining whether the mobile         station is detected by one of the base stations which         communicates with the mobile station as a cordless telephone;     -   (b) a location estimator for estimating a location of the mobile         station using location information related to data from a         distributed antenna system;     -   (c) a location estimator for estimating a location of the mobile         station by one of: triangulation and trilateration. -   Aspect 52. A method for locating a mobile station, comprising:     receiving, by said mobile station, a request control message from     one of a plurality of base stations, wherein said message is     received by a receiving antenna of said mobile station; the control     message providing information related to said message to at least     one of a control processor and a searcher receiver in said mobile     station; determining, using at least one of said control processor     and said searcher receiver, a plurality of pairs of radio signal     strength related values and corresponding signal time delays for a     wireless communication between said mobile station and at least a     first of the base stations, wherein for at least some of said pairs,     said signal time delays are different, and for each pair, said     signal strength related value for said pair is obtained using a     signal strength of said communication at said corresponding signal     time delay of said pair; transmitting signals for said pairs to one     or more of the base stations via a transmitting antenna of said     mobile station; routing data for at least one of said pairs from     said one or more base stations to a mobile station location     estimator for estimating a location of said mobile station. -   Aspect 53. A method for locating a mobile station, as in Aspect 52,     wherein said step of receiving uses one of a CDMA, an AMPS, a NAMPS     and a TDMA wireless standard. -   Aspect 54. A method for locating a mobile station, as in Aspect 52,     wherein said step of determining is performed for a wireless     communication between said mobile station and each of a plurality of     the base stations. -   Aspect 55. A method for locating a mobile station, as in Aspect 52,     wherein each of said signal time delays is included within a     predetermined corresponding time delay spread. -   Aspect 56. A method for locating a mobile station, as in Aspect 52,     wherein said step of determining includes a step of instructing, by     said control processor, said searcher receiver to output a plurality     of said radio signal strength related values for a plurality of     fingers resulting from said communication from said first base     station to said mobile station. -   Aspect 57. A method for locating a mobile station, as in Aspect 52,     wherein said step of determining includes inputting data for said     pairs to a modulator for modulating said data prior to said step of     transmitting. -   Aspect 58. A method for locating a mobile station, as in Aspect 57,     further including a step of establishing a software controllable     data connection between said control prdcessor and a mobile station     component including at least one of: a user digital baseband     component and said modulator, wherein said connection inputs said     data to said component. -   Aspect 59. A method for locating a mobile station, as in Aspect 52     further including a step of providing said data for said pairs to a     mobile station location estimating system having a first mobile     station location estimating component using time difference of     arrival measurements for locating said mobile station via one of     trilateration and triangulation. -   Aspect 60. A method for locating a mobile station, as in Aspect 59,     wherein said step of providing includes selecting one of: said first     mobile station estimating component, a second mobile station     estimating component using data obtained from a distributed antenna     system, and a third mobile station estimating component for using     data obtained from activation of a home base station. -   Aspect 61. A method for locating a mobile station, as in Aspect 60,     further including a step of computing a most likely location of said     mobile station using a fuzzy logic computation. -   Aspect 62. A method for locating a mobile station, as in Aspect 61,     wherein said step of computing is performed by said second mobile     station estimating component for determining a most likely floor     that said mobile station resides in a multi-story building having a     distributed antenna system. -   Aspect 63. A method for locating a mobile station, as in Aspect 59,     further including a step of requesting data for additional pairs of     radio signal strength related values and corresponding signal time     delays for a wireless communication between said mobile station and     at least a second base station of a commercial mobile radio service     provider different from a commercial mobile service provider for     said first base station. -   Aspect 64. A method for obtaining data related to wireless signal     characteristics, comprising: providing a user with a mobile station     for use when the user traverses a route having one or more     predetermined route locations, wherein one or more of the route     locations have a corresponding telephone number and a corresponding     description stored in the mobile station; performing the following     substeps when the user visits each of the route locations:     activating a call to said corresponding telephone number;     transmitting a code identifying the route location when the user is     substantially at the route location; storing an association of:     -   (a) signal characteristic measurements for wireless         communication between the mobile station and one or more base         stations, and     -   (b) a unique identifier for the route location obtained using         said code transmitted by said call;         -   Wherein said stored signal characteristic measurements are             accessible using said unique identifier. -   Aspect 65. A method as in Aspect 64, wherein said unique identifier     corresponds to one of: (a) an address for the route location,     and (b) a latitude and longitude of the route location. -   Aspect 66. A method as in Aspect 64, wherein said route is     periodically traversed by a user having a mobile station for     accomplishing said step of performing. -   Aspect 67. A method as in Aspect 64, wherein said step of storing     includes retaining said signal characteristic measurements in a data     storage for analyzing signal characteristic measurements of wireless     communications between mobile stations and a wireless infrastructure     of base stations. -   Aspect 68. A method as in Aspect 64, further including, prior to     said step of activating, a step of determining, by the user, that a     display on the mobile station uniquely identifies that said     corresponding description of the route location is available for     calling said corresponding telephone number and transmitting said     identifying code. -   Aspect 69. A method as in Aspect 64, wherein said step of storing     includes: obtaining a phone number identifying the mobile station;     providing said phone number identifying the mobile station to a     commercial mobile radio service provider in a request for said     signal characteristic measurements. -   Aspect 70. A method as in Aspect 64, wherein said step of storing     includes using a phone number identifying the mobile station in     combination with said transmitted identifying code for determining     said unique identifier. -   Aspect 71. A method as in Aspect 64, wherein said corresponding     description includes at least one of: a textual description of its     corresponding route location, and an address of its corresponding     route location. -   Aspect 72. A method as in Aspect 64, further including steps of:     associating said identifying code for the route location and said     unique identifier in a data storage prior to performing said step of     performing; accessing said data storage using said identifying code     for obtaining said unique identifier in said step of storing. -   Aspect 73. A method as in Aspect 64, further including a step of     accessing said stored signal characteristic measurements for     enhancing a performance of a process for locating mobile stations. -   Aspect 74. A method as in Aspect 64, wherein at least two of said     one or more base stations are in networks of different commercial     mobile radio service providers. -   Aspect 75. A method as in Aspect 64, further including a step of     filtering said signal characteristic measurements so that when said     signal characteristic measurements are suspected of being     transmitted from a location substantially different from the route     location, said step of storing is one of: (a) not performed, and (b)     performed so as to indicate that said signal characteristic     measurements are suspect. -   Aspect 76. A method as in Aspect 75, wherein said step of filtering     includes at least one of: (a) determining an amount by which an     estimated location of the mobile station using said signal     characteristic measurements differs from a location of the mobile     station obtained from said unique identifier; (b) determining     whether a predetermined amount of time has elapsed between     successive performances of said step of activating. -   Aspect 77. A method for locating a wireless mobile station,     comprising:     -   first receiving first signal characteristic measurements of         wireless signals communicated between a mobile station and a         first network of base stations, wherein said first signal         characteristic measurements includes:         -   (a) one or more pairs of wireless signal strength related             values and corresponding signal time delays for a wireless             communication between the mobile station and at least a             first of the base stations;         -   (b) data identifying operational characteristics of the             mobile station including information related to a signal             transmission power for the mobile station and information             for determining a maximum transmission power level of the             mobile station;     -   adjusting, for at least one of said pairs, its corresponding         wireless signal strength, using said data, thereby obtaining         corresponding adjusted pairs, wherein each adjusted pair has the         corresponding adjusted signal strength, and wherein said         adjusted signal strength is an expected signal strength of a         predetermined standardized mobile station transmitter power         level having a predetermined maximum transmission power and         operating at a predetermined transmission power level;     -   outputting second signal characteristic information, obtained         using said adjusted signal strength, to a mobile station         location estimator for determining a location estimate of said         first mobile station. -   Aspect 78. A method for locating a mobile station as in Aspect 77,     further including applying sequence of one or more signal processing     filters to one of: said pairs and said adjusted pairs. -   Aspect 79. A method for locating a mobile station as in Aspect 78,     wherein said sequence of filters is dependent upon a corresponding     mobile station location estimator. -   Aspect 80. A method for locating a mobile station as in Aspect 79,     wherein said sequence of filters is pipelined so that for first and     second filters of said sequence, an output of said first filter is     an input to said second filter. -   Aspect 81. A method for locating a mobile station as in Aspect 79,     wherein said filters include Sobel, Weiner, median and neighbor. -   Aspect 82. A method for locating a wireless mobile station,     comprising:     -   first receiving first signal characteristic measurements of         wireless signals communicated between a mobile station and a         first network of base stations, wherein said first signal         characteristic measurements includes one or more pairs of         wireless signal strength related values and corresponding signal         time delays for a wireless communication between the mobile         station and at least a first of the base stations;     -   categorizing said pairs into categories according to ranges of         signal strength related values and ranges of corresponding         signal time delays for obtaining a representation of a frequency         of occurrence of said one or more pairs in said categories;     -   applying one or more filters to said representation for one         of: (a) reducing characteristics of said representation that are         expected to be insufficiently repeatable for use in identifying         a location of the mobile station, and (b) enhancing a signal to         noise ratio;     -   supplying an output obtained from said step of applying to a         mobile station location estimator;     -   estimating a location of the mobile station using said mobile         station location estimator. -   Aspect 83. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 82, further including a step of requesting data for     additional pairs of wireless signal strength related values and     corresponding signal time delays for a wireless transmission between     the mobile station and at least a second base station of a second     network of base stations different from the base stations of the     first network, wherein said first and second networks communicate     with the mobile station in different signal bandwidths. -   Aspect 84. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 83, wherein the first network is operated by a first     commercial mobile radio service provider and the second network is     operated by a second commercial mobile radio service provider. -   Aspect 85. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 82, wherein said representation corresponds to a histogram. -   Aspect 86. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 82, further including a step of normalizing one of: (a) said     pairs, and (b) values corresponding to said output. -   Aspect 87. A method for locating a wireless mobile station as in     Aspect 23, wherein said step of activating further includes the step     of applying a fuzzy logic module which further discretizes the     location estimate provided from one of:     -   (a) a location estimator for estimating a location of the mobile         station using location information obtained from said         distributed antenna system;     -   (b) a location estimator for estimating a location of the mobile         station by one of: triangulation and trilateration. -   Aspect 88. A method for contacting a telephony station, comprising:     associating, by a user, a particular telephony number with a     collection of one or more telephony station numbers of telephony     stations with which the user desires to communicate when said     particular telephony number is called from a predetermined telephony     station; receiving said particular telephony number from the     predetermined telephony station; determining a location of said     predetermined telephony station and at least some of said telephony     stations having telephony station numbers in said collection;     selecting a first of said telephony stations having telephony     station numbers in said collection, wherein said first telephony     station is selected according to a location of said predetermined     telephony station and a location of first telephony station;     transmitting a user desired message to said first telephony station. -   Aspect 89. A method for locating a mobile station, comprising:     establishing, by a user of a particular mobile station, a collection     of identities of one or more persons having permission to receive a     location of said particular mobile station; receiving a request by a     first of said persons for locating said particular mobile station;     determining a location of said particular mobile station in response     to said request, said location determined using measurements of     wireless transmissions between said particular mobile station and a     first wireless network of base stations, wherein said base stations     are cooperatively linked for wireless communication; outputting said     location to the first person. -   Aspect 90. A method as in Aspect 89, wherein said step of     determining includes using measurements of wireless transmissions     between said particular mobile station and a second wireless network     of base stations provided by a different commercial wireless service     provider from a commercial wireless service provider for the first     wireless network. -   Aspect 91. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect     3, further including a means for providing a location estimate using     the Internet. -   Aspect 92. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect     3, further including a means for providing a location estimate using     digital certificate keys and the Internet. -   Aspect 93. An apparatus for locating a mobile station as in Aspect     91, further including a means for providing a location estimate     using push technology on the Internet: -   Aspect 94. A method for providing for each of a plurality of     wireless mobile units, corresponding one or more notifications     related to an event or circumstance, wherein there is a network     having a plurality of geographically spaced apart stationary network     access units for receiving wireless signals from the mobile unit,     comprising performing, for each mobile unit, M, of the mobile units,     the following steps by computational equipment:     -   (a) receiving network input by a subscriber to a service for         providing the corresponding notifications for M, the network         input for providing a data content in a persistent data storage,         the data content used for determining the corresponding         notifications;         -   wherein the data content includes: (i) an identification of             at least one entity authorized by the subscriber to be             notified of an occurrence of the related event or             circumstance, and (iii) one or more notification criteria             whose evaluation is for determining whether an occurrence of             the related event or circumstance has occurred;     -   (b) subsequently, receiving information indicative of a location         for the mobile unit M, wherein the information is determined         using geolocation indicative measurements of wireless signals         communicated between the mobile unit M and the network;     -   (c) using an identification for the mobile unit M to access the         data content in the persistent data storage for evaluating the         notification criteria using the information; and     -   (d) when the notification criteria evaluates to a first result,         a step of notifying the at least one entity by a network         transmission of an occurrence of the event or circumstance and         location information indicative of a location of the mobile unit         M, wherein the location information is determined using         geolocation indicative measurements of wireless signals         communicated between the mobile unit M and the network. -   Aspect 95. The method of Aspect 94, wherein for at least one of the     mobile units, the corresponding event or circumstance includes an     availability of a parking space, and one of the corresponding     notifications is transmitted to the at least one mobile unit.

Further description of the advantages, benefits and patentable aspects of the present disclosure will become evident from the accompanying drawings and description hereinbelow. All novel aspects of the present disclosure, whether mentioned explicitly in this Summary section or not, are considered subject matter for patent protection either singly or in combination with other aspects of the present disclosure. Accordingly, such novel aspects of the present disclosure and/or in the drawings that may be omitted from, or less than fully described in this Summary section are fully incorporated herein by reference into this Summary. In particular, all claims of the Claims section hereinbelow are fully incorporated herein by reference into this Summary section.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 illustrates an overall view of a wireless location system and method for using multiple commercial mobile radio service providers;

FIG. 2 shows is a high level wireless location architecture using the intelligent network, which illustrates aspects of the home base station and Internet connectivity for receiving location requests and for providing location estimates;

FIG. 3 illustrates how the signals from the base stations associated with various multiple commercial radio service providers can be shared with the wireless location system to provide an improved geometry and thus improved wireless location accuracy.

FIG. 4 shows how the mobile station database in the location system is updated via interfaces in communication with multiple commercial mobile radio service providers using customer care systems.

FIG. 5 shows a method of direct access to multiple CMRS base stations, from the location system perspective, thus avoiding the need to significantly modify network infrastructure systems.

FIG. 6 illustrates physical components and the effects of predetermined signal delay, and total system delay in a distributed antenna environment for purposes of wireless location;

FIG. 7 shows the timing relationships among the signals within a distributed antenna system.

FIG. 8 shows a flowchart of the methods and procedures required to implement a DA database;

FIG. 9 illustrates an exemplary DA configuration with a direct antenna connection to the base stations;

FIG. 10 illustrates an alternative DA configuration using multipoint microwave;

FIG. 11 illustrates how multiple base stations could be used via a microwave circuit to provide PCS and location service to a multilevel building via virtual pilot channels;

FIG. 12 shows the DA delay spread ranges possible for a 500 microsecond guard zone;

FIG. 13 shows DA-cell layout a geometry and how location geometries can be constructed;

FIG. 14 illustrates the realization of actual measurements and classification utilized within DA cell ranges to determine a percent range within each cell.

FIG. 15 shows the standard components of a CDMA MS.

FIG. 16 shows one embodiment for MS modification that facilities enhanced RF measurement telemetry.

FIG. 17 shows how the LC is used in a Home Base Station architecture.

FIG. 18 illustrates a typical case where signals from three base stations can be detected.

FIG. 19 illustrates a typical case where signals from four base stations (including remaining set information) can be detected.

FIG. 20 shows a MS detection scheme with a two base station geometry.

FIG. 21 illustrates a typical amorphous location area with only the signal detection of a single base station sector, by a MS.

FIG. 22 shows a series of typical reverse path CDMA RF measurements in a dense urban area.

FIG. 23 shows a series of typical reverse path CDMA RF measurements in a rural setting.

FIG. 24 shows a typical Location Center connection to a CTIA Model.

FIG. 25 shows a typical national Location Center and relevant network connections.

FIG. 26 illustrates a typical three dimensional delay spread profile.

FIG. 27 shows the magnifying effects of convoluting similar-property forward and reverse path three-dimensional images.

FIG. 28 illustrates an image and relief representation of a CDMA Delay Spread Profile.

FIG. 29 illustrates the main components of the Signal Processing Subsystem 20.

FIG. 30 illustrates an image based on an RF signal measurement sample set, before image histogram equalization filtering is applied.

FIG. 31 illustrates an image based on an RF signal measurement sample set, after image histogram equalization input cropping filtering is applied.

FIG. 32 illustrates an image sample grid before image filtering.

FIG. 33 shows a CDMA profile image after input cropping is used at a level of 50 percent.

FIG. 34 illustrates the results of combining input cropping at 40 percent, then performing four by four median filtering on the resultant.

FIG. 35 shows the results of combining input cropping at 50 percent with four by four median filtering.

FIG. 36 illustrates how location estimates can be provided using voice channel connections via an ACD and Internet technology.

FIG. 37 shows wireless Location of a MS using the Voice Channel from a Hunt Group.

FIG. 38 illustrates how location information can be provided via Text paging or short message service messaging.

FIG. 39 shows how location information of an MS can be provided via Internet via “Push” technology.

FIG. 40 illustrates how location directions can be provided to nearest members, regarding directions for each individual member to reach a distressed MS caller.

FIG. 41 illustrates how traveling instructions from two different points can be provided to an initiator.

FIG. 42 illustrates how wireless location services can be used to facilitate automotive rental car tracking and control.

FIG. 43 indicates the addition of a fuzzy logic module which discretizes the wireless location estimate output from the TOA/TDOA location estimator module.

FIG. 44 is a high level diagram of an embodiment for locating a mobile station (MS) within a radio coverage area.

FIGS. 45(1), 45(2) and 45(3) is a high level diagram of an embodiment of the Location Center 142.

FIG. 46 shows a high level block diagram of the Mobile Base Station (MBS).

FIG. 47 is a high level state transition diagram describing computational states the Mobile Base station enters during operation.

FIG. 48 is a high level diagram illustrating the data structural organization of the Mobile Base station capability for autonomously determining a most likely MBS location from a plurality of potentially conflicting MBS location estimating sources.

FIGS. 49, 49(1), 49(2), 49(3) and 49(4) show another high level block diagram view of the Location Center 142.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Various digital wireless communication standards have been introduced such as code division multiple access (CDMA) and Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) (e.g., Global Systems Mobile (GSM). These standards provide numerous enhancements for advancing the quality and communication capacity for wireless applications. Referring to CDMA, this standard is described in the Telephone Industries Association standard IS-95, for frequencies below 1 GHz, and in J-STD-008, the Wideband Spread-Spectrum Digital Cellular System Dual-Mode Mobile Station-Base station Compatibility Standard, for frequencies in the 1.8-1.9 GHz frequency bands.

Additionally, CDMA general principles have been described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,109,390, Diversity Receiver in a CDMA Cellular Telephone System, by Gilhousen, et al, filed Nov. 7, 1989. There are numerous advantages of such digital wireless technologies such as CDMA radio technology. For example, the CDMA spread spectrum scheme exploits radio frequency spectral efficiency and isolation by monitoring voice activity, managing two-way power control, provision of advanced variable-rate modems and error correcting signal design, and includes inherent resistance to fading, enhanced privacy, and provides for multiple “rake” digital data receivers and searcher receivers for correlation of multiple physical propagation paths, resembling maximum likelihood detection, as well as support for multiple base station communication with a mobile station, i.e., soft or softer hand-off capability. When coupled with a location center as described herein, substantial improvements in radio location can be achieved. For example, the CDMA spread spectrum scheme exploits radio frequency spectral efficiency and isolation by monitoring voice activity, managing two-way power control, provision of advanced variable-rate modems and error correcting signal design, and includes inherent resistance to fading, enhanced privacy, and provides for multiple “rake” digital data receivers and searcher receivers for correlation of multiple physical propagation paths, resembling maximum likelihood detection, as well as support for multiple base station communication with a mobile station, i.e., soft hand-off capability. Moreover, this same advanced radio communication infrastructure can also be used for enhanced radio location. As a further example, the capabilities of IS-41 and AIN already provide a broad-granularity of wireless location, as is necessary to, for example, properly direct a terminating call to a mobile station. Such information, originally intended for call processing usage, can be re-used in conjunction with the location center described herein to provide wireless location in the large (i.e., to determine which country, state and city a particular mobile station is located) and wireless location in the small (i.e., which location, plus or minus a few hundred feet within one or more base stations a given mobile station is located).

Related content to the present disclosure is provided in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/194,367 filed Nov. 24, 1998 now U.S. Pat. No. 7,764,231, this patent being incorporated fully herein by reference. Related content is also provided in U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/056,590 filed Aug. 20, 1997; U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/044,821 filed Apr. 25, 1997; and U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/025,855 filed Sep. 9, 1996, each of these patent applications also being fully incorporated herein by reference.

FIG. 1 illustrates a wireless location network using two commercial mobile radio service provider networks for an embodiment of the present disclosure. Accordingly, this figure illustrates the interconnections between the components of a typical wireless network configuration and various components that are specific to the embodiment. In particular, as one skilled in the art will understand, a typical wireless network includes: (a) a mobile switching center (MSC) 112 a; (b) generally a service control point 4a, and base stations (not shown) which are in communication with a mobile switch center 112 a. Within a typical metropolitan area it is also common for a second commercial mobile radio service (CMRS) provider to offer wireless service within essentially similar coverage areas, such systems typically including an mobile switch center 112 b, service control point 4b, and associated base stations (not shown). Added to this wireless network, the present embodiment provides the following additional components:

(1) a location system or center 142 which is required for determining a location of a target mobile station using signal characteristic values as measured by the target mobile station (not shown) and nearby base stations (not shown), further including of the following modules or subsystem components:

(1.1) an application programming interface 14 (having a controller also denoted by the label “14”), for physically interfacing with and controlling the messaging to and from each CMRS mobile switch center 112 a, 112 b, service control points 4a and 4b, receiving location requests from either the mobile switch center 112 a, or 112 b, or the Internet 468, and providing connection to the signal processing subsystem 20;

(1.2) a signal processing subsystem 20, which is in communication with the application programming interface (L-API) 14. The signal processor 20 receives, queues, filters and processes signal measurement messages into various formats suitable for the location estimate modules DA 10 and TOA/TDOA 8;

(1.3) a TOA/TDOA location estimate module 8, in communication with the signal processing subsystem 20. The TOA/TDOA module 8 provides a location estimate result, using a time of arrival or a time difference of arrival technique based on conditioned signals from the signal processing subsystem 20; in addition the TOA/TDOA module may also process signals from the distributed antenna module 10, in order to provide a location estimate within environments containing distributed antenna systems;

(1.4) a distributed antenna (DA) module 10, which receives signals related to distributed antennas, from the signal processor 20 in communication a location estimating capability for utilizing one or more distributed antenna systems 168 as shown in FIG. 2, wherein each such system 168 provides wireless location information for an MS 140 within the area in communication with one or more distributed antenna system 168.

(1.5) a home base station module (HBS) 6 in FIG. 1, which receives signals from the (application programming interface) controller 14 and determines wireless location (i.e., providing a location estimate result) based on registration principles of the wireless user's mobile station when in communication with the user's home base station (not shown) in communications with a given service control point 4a or 4b, containing a home base station application (not shown).

Since home base stations and distributed antenna systems can be located on potentially each floor of a multi-story building, in such cases where infrastructure is installed, the wireless location technology described herein can be used to perform location in terms of height as well as by Latitude and Longitude.

Referring to FIG. 2, additional detail is provided of typical base station coverage areas, sectorization, and high level components used in the present disclosure's scope, including the mobile switch center 112, a mobile station 140 in communication with a home base station 160, and communication between the location system 142 and the public Internet 468, via an Internet service provider interface 472. A novel aspect of the present disclosure includes providing wireless location estimate information to various designated users via the public Internet. Although base stations may be placed in any configuration, a typical deployment configuration is approximately in a cellular honeycomb pattern, although many practical tradeoffs exist, such as site availability, versus the requirement for maximal terrain coverage area. To illustrate, such exemplary base stations (BSs) 122 a through 122 g are shown, each of which radiate referencing signals within their area of coverage to facilitate mobile station (MS) 140 radio frequency connectivity, and various timing and synchronization functions. A given base station may contain no sectors (not shown), thus radiating and receiving signals in a 360 degree omnidirectional coverage area pattern, or the base station may contain “smart antennas” (not shown) which have specialized coverage area patterns.

Alternatively and generally most frequent are base stations having three sector coverage area patterns. Shown in FIG. 2, each sector for base station 122 a through 122 g contains three sectors, labeled a, b, and c, which represent antennas that radiate and receive signals in an approximate 120 degree arc, from an overhead view. As one skilled in the art will understand, actual base station coverage areas generally are designed to overlap to some extent, thus ensuring seamless coverage in a geographical area. Control electronics within each base station are used to communicate with a given mobile station 140. Further, during communication with the mobile station the exact base station identification and sector identification information are known and are provided to the location center 142.

The base stations located at their cell sites may be coupled by various transport facilities 176 such as leased lines, frame relay, T-Carrier links, optical fiber links or by microwave communication links.

When the mobile station is powered on and in the idle state, it constantly monitors the pilot signal transmissions from each of the base stations located at nearby cell sites. As illustrated in FIG. 3, base station/sector coverage areas may often overlap both in the context of a single CMRS base station network, and also in the context of multiple CMRS base station networks, thus enabling mobile stations to detect, and, in the case of certain technologies, communicate simultaneously along both the forward and reverse paths, with multiple base stations/sectors, either with a single CMRS network or, in the case of hand-offs and roaming, multiple CMRS network equipment. In FIG. 3 the constantly radiating pilot signals from base station sectors 122 a, 122 b and 122 c are detectable by mobile station 140 at its location. The mobile station 140 scans each pilot channel, which corresponds to a given base station/sector ID, and determines which cell it is in by comparing signals strengths of pilot signals transmitted from these particular cell-sites.

The mobile station 140 then initiates a registration request with the mobile switch center 112 a, via the base station controller (not shown). The mobile switch center 112 a determines whether or not the mobile station 140 is allowed to proceed with the registration process (except in the case of a 911 call, wherein no registration process is required). At this point, calls may be originated from the mobile station 140 or calls or short message service messages can be received from the mobile switch center 112 a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the mobile switch center 112 communicates as appropriate, with a class 4/5 wireline telephony circuit switch or other central offices, with telephone trunks in communication with the public switch telephone network (PSTN) 124. Such central offices connect to wireline stations, such as telephones, or any communication device compatible with the line, such as a personal or home base station. The PSTN may also provide connections to long distance networks and other networks.

The mobile switch center 112 may also utilize IS/41 data circuits or trunks 522, which in turn connects to a service control point 104, using, for example, signaling system #7 (SS7) signaling link protocols for intelligent call processing, as one skilled in the art will understand. In the case of wireless advanced intelligent network (AIN) services such trunks and protocols are used for call routing instructions of balls interacting with the mobile switch center 112 or any switch capable of providing service switching point functions, and the public switched telephone network (PSTN) 124, with possible termination back to the wireless network. In the case of an mobile station 140 in communication with a corresponding home or office base station (HBS) 160, the HBS 160 controls, processes and interfaces the mobile station 140 to the PSTN 124, in a manner similar to a cordless telephone system, except that added AIN logic within, for example, the service control point (SCP) 104 is used to determine if the mobile station 140 is being controlled by the HBS 160 or a wireless base station 122. Regarding non-HBS calls, the mobile switch center 112 may direct calls between mobile stations 140 via the appropriate cell site base stations 122 a through 122 h since such mobile stations 140 do not typically communicate directly with one another in such wireless standards as CDMA, TDMA NAMPS, AMPS and GSM.

Referring again to FIG. 2, the Location system 142 interfaces with the mobile switch center 112 either via dedicated transport facilities 178, using for example, any number of LAN/WAN technologies, such as Ethernet, fast Ethernet, frame relay, virtual private networks, etc., or via the PSTN 124 (not shown). The location system 142 receives autonomous (e.g., unsolicited) or command/response messages regarding, for example: (a) the wireless network states, including for example, the fact that a base station has been taken in or out of service, (b) mobile station 140 and BS 122 radio frequency (RF) signal measurements, (c) notifications from a SCP 104 indicating that an HBS 160 has detected and registered with the SCP 104 the mobile station 140 corresponding to the HBS 160, and (d) any distributed antenna systems 168. Conversely, the location system 142 provides data and control information to each of the above components in (a)-(d). Additionally, the Location system 142 may provide location information to a mobile station 140, via a BS 122, using, for example the short message service protocol, or any data communication protocol supported by the air interface between the base station and the mobile station. Interface 106 connecting the location system 142 with the service control point 104 may also be required in the event the home location register and/or the home base station AIN function is located in the SCP 104.

Assuming the wireless technology CDMA is used, each BS 122 a, 122 b, 122 c, through 122 g uses a time offset of the pilot PN sequence to identify a forward CDMA pilot channel. Furthermore, time offsets, in CDMA chip sizes, may be re-used within a PCS system, thus providing efficient use of pilot time offset chips, thus achieving spectrum efficiency.

The use of distributed antennas is another technique for improving or extending the RF coverage of a radio coverage area 120 of a wireless system. Such distributed antennas are typically used in buildings or other areas of dense clutter, such as numerous walls, partitions and/or similar structures causing substantial signal attenuation. As shown in FIGS. 6, 9, 10, 11, and 13, distributed antennas 168 are typically connected together in a serial fashion for communicating with one or more infrastructure base stations 122. Distributed antennas may be connected to the mobile switch center 112 via various air interfaces, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, or alternately distributed antennas may be connected to the MSC via a directed connection to a base station 122 as shown in FIG. 9, or via a private branch exchange (PBX) as shown in FIG. 13.

Referring to FIG. 11, distributed antennas 168 are useful particularly in wireless system configurations involving microcells, and potentially indoor environments, such as wireless systems in communication with private branch exchange systems (reference FIG. 13) in business offices, and in wireless local loop applications (not shown) as one skilled in the art will understand. Additionally, a distributed antenna embodiment can provide significant improvements in decreasing location error, as compared with an indoor mobile station 140 (reference FIG. 11) user with a wireless connection to an outdoor, infrastructure base station 122, as illustrated in FIGS. 11, 12, 13 and 14.

A Second Embodiment of the Location Center

FIG. 44 is a high level diagram of a wireless digital Radiolocation Intelligent Network Architecture for the present disclosure. Accordingly, this figure illustrates the interconnections between the components of a typical PCS network configuration and various components that are specific to the present disclosure. In particular, as one skilled in the art will understand, a typical wireless (PCS) network includes: (a) a mobile switching center (MSC) 112; (b) a plurality of wireless cell sites in a radio coverage area 120 having infrastructure base stations such as those labeled 122, 125, 127 and 156 in FIG. 44 (wherein the label 122 will be used herein to refer base stations in general); (c) a public switched telephone network (PSTN) 124 (which may include signaling system links 106 having network control components such as service control point 104, one or more signaling transfer points (STPs) 110; and (d) a (large) plurality of MSs 140. Added to this wireless network, the present disclosure provides the following additional components:

(10.1) a location center 142 which is required for determining a location of a target MS using signal characteristic values for this target MS;

(10.2) one or more mobile base stations 148 (MBS) which are optional, for physically traveling toward the target MS or tracking the target MS;

(10.3) a plurality of location base stations 152 (LBS) which are optional, distributed within the radio coverage areas 120, each LBS 152 having a relatively small MS detection area 154;

(10.4) a plurality of subscriber home/business base stations 160 (hereinafter simply denoted home base stations 160, or HBS, which are optional) wherein a corresponding MS 140 electronically paired with an HBS 160 may become a cordless telephone when it is within proximity of its paired HBS 160. Note that the HBS 160 typically would share a wireline connection with the users home telephone 162, although this arrangement is not required, as long as the HBS 160 has a wireline connection to the PSTN 124. Alternatively a wireless local loop interface 164 can be used for both a wireline simulated connection to the home, as well as a wireless interface. Accordingly, as described in detail herein below, when the MS 140 is detected by the HBS 160, an embodiment of the present disclosure registers this detection with the PSTN 124 and with the location center 142. Thus, such registration may be communicated to the location center 142 when a request for locating the MS 140 is provided;

(10.5) a location estimating capability for utilizing one or more distributed antenna systems 168, which is optional, within buildings wherein each such system 168 provides wireless location information for an MS 140 within the area in communication with one or more distributed antennas 168. Note, as will be discussed in detail below, that such distributed antenna systems 168 are particularly useful when the interior of the building provides poor communication with the base stations 122, 125, and 127.

Since location base stations, home base stations and distributed antennas can be located on potentially each floor of a multi-story building, the wireless location technology described herein can be used to perform location in terms of height as well as by Latitude and Longitude.

In operation, the MS 140 may utilize one of the wireless technologies, CDMA, TDMA or GSM techniques for radio communication with: (a) one or more infrastructure base stations 122, 125, and/or 127, (b) mobile base station(s) 148, (c) a distributed antenna system 168 (which may be, in turn, in communication with a base station 125, (d) an LBS 152 and/or (e) an HBS 160.

Referring to FIG. 44 again, additional detail is provided of typical base station coverage areas, sectorization, and high level components within a radio coverage area 120, including the MSC 112. Although base stations may be placed in any configuration, a typical deployment configuration is approximately in a cellular honeycomb pattern, although many practical tradeoffs exist, such as site availability, versus the requirement for maximal terrain coverage area. To illustrate, three such exemplary base stations (BSs) 122, 125 and 127 are shown, each of which radiate referencing signals within their area of coverage to facilitate mobile station (MS) 140 radio frequency connectivity, and various timing and synchronization functions. A given base station may contain no sectors, thus radiating and receiving signals in a 360 degree omnidirectional coverage area pattern, or the base station may contain “smart antennas” which have specialized coverage area patterns. Alternatively and generally most frequent are base stations having three sector coverage area patterns. Shown in FIG. 44, each sector for base station 122, sector a 130, sector b 132, and sector c 131, radiates and receives signals in an approximate 120 degree arc, from an overhead view. As one skilled in the art will understand, actual base station coverage areas generally are designed to overlap to some extent, thus ensuring seamless coverage in a geographical area. Control electronics within each base station are used to communicate with a given mobile station 140. Information regarding the coverage area for each sector, such as its range, area, and “holes” or areas of no coverage within the radio coverage area 120, are known information which is used by the location center 142 to facilitate location determination. Further, during communication with the mobile station the exact base station identification and sector identification information are known and are provided to the location center 142.

In the case of the non-home base station communication of location information, a base station or mobility controller 174 (BSC) controls, processes and interfaces originating and terminating telephone calls between the mobile station (MS) 140, and the mobile switch center (MSC) 112. The MSC also performs various administration functions such as mobile station registration, authentication and the relaying of various system parameters.

The base stations located at their cell sites may be coupled by various transport facilities 176 such as leased lines, frame relay, T-Carrier links, optical fiber links or by microwave communication links.

When the mobile station is powered on and in the idle state, it constantly monitors the pilot signal transmissions from each of the base stations located at nearby cell sites. As illustrated in FIG. 44, base station/sector coverage areas may often overlap, thus enabling mobile stations to detect, and, in the case of certain technologies, communicate simultaneously along both the forward and reverse paths, with multiple base stations/sectors. In FIG. 44 the constantly radiating pilot signals from base station sectors 122, 125 and 127 are detectable by mobile station 140 at its location. The mobile station 140 scans each pilot channel, which corresponds to a given base station/sector ID, and determines which cell it is in by comparing signals strengths of pilot signals transmitted from these particular cell-sites.

The mobile station 140 then initiates a registration request with the MSC 112, via the base station controller 174. The MSC determines whether or not the mobile station 140 is allowed to proceed with the registration process (except in the case of a 911 call, wherein no registration process is required). At this point calls may be originated from the mobile station 140 or calls or short message service messages can be received from the network. The MSC communicates as appropriate, with a class 4/5 wireline telephony circuit switch or other central offices, connected to the PSTN network. Such central offices connect to wireline terminals, such as telephones, or any communication device compatible with the line, such as a personal or home base station. The PSTN may also provide connections to long distance networks and other networks.

The MSC 112 may also utilize IS/41 data circuits or trunks connecting to signal transfer point 110, which in turn connects to a service control point 104, via Signaling System #7 (SS7) signaling links (e.g., trunks) for intelligent call processing, as one skilled in the art will understand. In the case of wireless AIN services such links are used for call routing instructions of calls interacting with the MSC 112 or any switch capable of providing service switching point functions, and the public switched telephone network (PSTN) 124, with possible termination back to the wireless network. In the case of an MS 140 in communication with a corresponding home or office base station BBS 160, the BBS 160 controls, processes and interfaces the MS 140 to the PSTN 124, in a manner similar to a cordless telephone system, except that added AIN logic within, for example, the service control point (SCP) 104 is used to determine if the MS 140 is being controlled by the HBS 160 or a wireless base station 122. Regarding non-BBS calls, the BSC 174 may direct calls between MSs 140 via the appropriate cell site BSs since such MSs 140 do not typically communicate directly with one another in such wireless standards as CDMA, TDMA and GSM.

Referring to FIG. 44 again, the Location Center (LC) 142 interfaces with the MSC 112 either via dedicated transport facilities 178, using for example, any number of LAN/WAN technologies, such as Ethernet, fast Ethernet, frame relay, virtual private networks, etc., or via the PSTN 179. The LC 142 receives autonomous (e.g., unsolicited) or command/response messages regarding, for example: (a) the wireless network states, (b) MS 140 and BS 122 radio frequency (RF) measurements, notifications from a SCP 104 indicating that an HBS 160 has detected (and registered with the SCP 104) the MS 140 corresponding to the HBS 160, (d) any MBSs 148, (e) any distributed antenna systems 168, (f) any location base stations 152, and (g) location applications requesting MS locations using the location center. Conversely, the LC 142 provides data and control information to each of the above components in (a)-(g). Additionally, the LC 142 may provide location information to an MS 140, via a BS 122. Moreover, in the case of the use of a mobile base station (MBS) 148, several communications paths may exist with the LC 142.

The MBS 148 acts as a low cost, partially-functional, moving base station, and is, in one embodiment, situated in a vehicle where an operator may engage in MS 140 searching and tracking activities. In providing these activities using CDMA, the MBS 148 provides a forward link pilot channel for a target MS 140, and subsequently receives unique BS pilot strength measurements from the MS 140. The MBS 148 also includes a mobile station for data communication with the LC 142, via a BS 122. In particular, such data communication includes telemetering the geographic position of the MBS 148 as well as various RF measurements related to signals received from the target MS 140. In some embodiments, the MBS 148 may also utilize multiple-beam fixed antenna array elements and/or a moveable narrow beam antenna, such as a microwave dish 182. The antennas for such embodiments may have a known orientation in order to further deduce a radio location of the target MS 216 with respect to an estimated current location of the MBS 148. The MBS 148 may further contain a global positioning system (GPS), distance sensors, dead-reckoning electronics, as well as an on-board computing system and display devices for locating both the MBS 148 itself as well as tracking and locating the target MS 140. The computing and display provides a means for communicating the position of the target MS 140 on a map display to an operator of the MBS 148.

Each location base station (LBS) 152 a and 152 b is a low cost location device. Each such LBS 152 a and 152 b communicates with one or more of the infrastructure base stations 156 using one or more wireless technology interface standards. In some embodiments, to provide such LBS's cost effectively, each LBS 152 a and 152 b only partially or minimally supports the air-interface standards of the one or more wireless technologies used in communicating with both the BSs 156 and the target MSs 140. Each LBS 152 a and 152 b, when put in service, is placed at a fixed location, such as a traffic signal, lamp post, etc. and wherein the location of the LBS may be determined as accurately as, for example, the accuracy of the locations of the infrastructure BSs 122. Assuming the wireless technology CDMA is used, each BS 156, 122, 125, 127 uses a time offset of the pilot PN sequence to identify a forward CDMA pilot channel. In one embodiment, each LBS emits a unique, time-offset pilot PN sequence channel in accordance with the CDMA standard in the RF spectrum designated for BSs 122, 125, and 127, such that the channel does not interfere with neighboring BS 156 cell site channels, nor would it interfere with neighboring LBSs. Furthermore, time offsets, in CDMA chip sizes, may be re-used within a PCS system, thus providing efficient use of pilot time offset chips, thus achieving spectrum efficiency. Each LBS 152 a and 152 b may also contain multiple wireless receivers in order to monitor transmissions from a target MS 140. Additionally, each LBS 152 a and 152 b contains mobile station 140 electronics, thereby allowing the LBS to both be controlled by the LC 142, and to transmit information to the LC 142 via at least one neighboring BS 156.

As mentioned above, when the location of a particular target MS 140 is desired, the LC 142 can request location information about the target MS 140 from, for instance, one or more activated LBSs 152 a and 152 b in a geographical area of interest. Accordingly, whenever the target MS 140 is in the area, or is suspected of being in the area, either upon command from the LC 142 or in a substantially continuous fashion; the LBS's pilot channel appears to the target MS 140 as a potential neighboring BS channel, and consequently, is placed, for example, in the CDMA neighboring set, or the CDMA remaining set, of the MS 140 (as one familiar with the CDMA standards will understand). During the normal CDMA pilot search sequence of the mobile station initialization state (in the target MS), the target MS 140 will, if within range of such an activated LBS 152 a and 152 b, detect the LBS pilot presence during the CDMA pilot channel acquisition substrate. Consequently, the target MS 140 performs RF measurements on the LBS signal. Similarly, an activated LBS 152 a can perform RF measurements on the wireless signals from the target MS 140. The LBS 152 a and 152 b may subsequently telemeter back to the LC 142 measurement results related to signals from/to the target MS 140. Thus, upon command, the target MS 140 will telemeter back to the LC 142 its own measurements of the LBSs 152 a and 152 b, and consequently, this new information, in conjunction with other BSs 122, can be used to more accurately locate the target MS 140.

It should be noted that the LBS will normally deny hand-off requests, since typically the LBS does not require the added complexity of handling voice or traffic bearer channels, although economics and peak traffic load conditions would dictate preference here. GPS timing information, needed by any CDMA BS, is either achieved via the inclusion of a local GPS receiver or via a telemetry process from a neighboring normal BS, which contains a GPS receiver and timing information. As energy requirements are minimal, potentially rechargeable batteries or solar cells may be used to power the LBS. No expensive terrestrial transport link is typically required since two-way communication is provided by the MS, thus LBSs may be placed in numerous locations, particularly in dense urban canyon areas, remote skiing/highway areas, or anywhere more precision is required for location and/or traffic-handling purposes, is needed.

The use of distributed antennas is another technique for improving or extending the RF coverage of a radio coverage area 120 of a wireless system. Such distributed antennas are typically used in buildings or other areas of dense clutter, such as numerous walls, partitions and/or similar structures causing substantial signal attenuation. As shown in FIG. 9, distributed antennas 168 are typically connected together in a serial fashion to a mini base station for communicating with the infrastructure base stations 122.

Distributed antennas 168 are useful particularly in wireless system configurations involving microcells, and potentially indoor environments, such as PBX (private branch exchange) systems in business offices, and in wireless local loop applications as one skilled in the art will understand. Additionally, a distributed antenna embodiment can provide significant improvements in decreasing location error, as compared with an indoor MS 140 user with a wireless connection to an outdoor, infrastructure base station 122.

Mobile Station Description

As an example of a mobile station 140, such a mobile station will be described using CDMA technology. FIG. 15 illustrates a typical block diagram of the functional components of a CDMA mobile station (MS) 140, based on the patent, “Diversity Receiver in a CDMA Cellular Telephone System”, U.S. Pat. No. 5,109,390. The MS 140 contains an antenna 510 coupled through diplexer 512 to analog receiver 514 and transmit power amplifier 516. Antenna 510 and diplexer 512 permit simultaneous transmission and reception of signals through an antenna 510. Antenna 510 collects transmitted signals and provides them through diplexer 512 to analog receiver 514. Receiver 514 receives the RF frequency signals, typically either in the 800-900 MHZ or 1.8-1.9 GHz band, from diplexer 512, for amplification and frequency down conversion to an intermediate frequency (IF). Translation is accomplished through the use of a frequency synthesizer of standard design which permits the receiver 514 to be tuned to any of the frequencies within the designated receive frequency band. The IF signal is passed through a surface acoustic wave bandpass filter, typically of 1.25 MHZ bandwidth, to match the waveform of the signal transmitted by a base station 122. Receiver 514 also provides an analog to digital converter (not shown) for converting the IF signal to a digital signal. The digital signal is provided to each of four or more data receivers (520, 522, 524, and 526), one of which is a searcher receiver (526) with the remainder being data receivers, as one skilled in the art will understand.

Analog receiver 514 also performs a open-loop type of power control function for adjusting the transmit power of the mobile station 140 on the reverse link channel. Receiver 514 measures the forward link signal strength of the signals from base stations 122, then generates an analog power control signal to circuitry in the transmit power amplifier 516, which can effect a range up to about 80 dB. The power control for the transmit power amplifier 516 is also supplemented by a closed-loop power control or mobile attenuation code (MAC) control parameter sent to the mobile station 140 via the air (i.e., wireless) interface from a BS 122, with either the CMAC or VMAC command (as one knowledgeable in CDMA standards will understand). The MAC can take on one of eight values 0 through 7, which effect a closed loop to raise or lower the power correction. The transmit amplifier 516 may utilize one of three transmit power classes when transmitting within a transmitted power control group in the 800-900 MHZ cellular band: class I (1 to 8 dBW), class II (−3 to 4 dBW), or class III (−7 to 0 dBW), for a closed-loop range of about “32 dB. In the PCS 1.8-1.9 GHz band five classes are defined: class I (−2 to 3 dBW), class II (−7 to 0 dBW), class III (−12 to −3 dBW), class IV (−17 to −6 dBW), class V (−22 to −9 dBW), for a closed-loop range of about” 40 dB. The mobile station 140 power class and transmit power level for a communicating mobile station 140 is known to the wireless infrastructure network, and may be utilized for location estimation, as is described hereinbelow.

The digitized IF signal may contain the signals from several telephone calls together with the pilot channels and multipath delayed signals from each of several pilot channels. Searcher receiver 526, under control of control processor 534, continuously scans the time domain around the nominal time delay offsets of pilot channels contained within the active, candidate, neighboring and remaining sets of pilot channels. The initial sets of pilot channels and a defined search window size for each set are provided by a control message from a BS 122 via the air interface to the mobile station 140. The searcher receiver 526 measures the strength of any reception of a desired waveform at times other than the nominal time and measures each pilot channel's arrival time relative to each pilot's PN sequence offset value. Receiver 526 also compares signal strength in the received signals. Receiver 526 provides a signal strength signal to control processor 534 indicative of the strongest signals and relative time relationships.

Control processor 534 provides signals to control digital data receivers 520, 522 and 524 such that each of these receivers processes a different one of the strongest signals. Note, as one skilled in the art will understand, the strongest signal, or finger, may not be the signal of shortest arrival time, but rather may be a reflected, and therefore delayed, signal (such reflected denoted collectively as “multipath”). Data receivers 520, 522 and 524 may track and process multipath signals from the same forward channel pilot channel offset or from a different forward channel pilot offset. In the case where a different pilot channel offset signal is of greater strength than the current cell site (or more specifically the current base station 122) pilot channel offset, then control processor 534 generates a control message for transmission on a reverse channel from the mobile station 140 to the current BS 122, requesting a transfer of the call, or a soft hand-off, to the now strongest cell site Base station 122. Note that each of the four receivers 520, 522, 524 and 526 can be directed independently from each other. The three data receivers 520, 522, and 524 are capable of tracking and demodulating multipath signals from of the forward CDMA pilot channel. Thus data receivers 520, 522 and 524 may provide reception of information via separate multipath signals from one BS 122 (e.g., in particular, an antenna face of a sectored antenna at the BS 122, or reception of signals from a number of sectors at the same BS 122, or reception of signals from multiple BSs 122 or their antenna faces of sectored antennas. Upon receiving a CDMA pilot measurement request order command, or whenever: (a) the mobile station 140 detects a pilot signal of sufficient strength, not associated with any of the assigned forward traffic channels currently assigned, or (b) the mobile station 140 is in preparation for a soft or hard hand-off, then the searcher receiver 526 responds by measuring and reporting the strengths of received pilots and the receivers definition of the pilot arrival time of the earliest useable multipath component of the pilot, in units of PN chips (one chip=0.813802 microseconds). The receiver 526 computes the strength of a pilot by adding the ratios of received pilot energy per chip E_(c), to total received spectral density, I_(o), of at most k useable multipath components, where k is the number of data receivers supported in the mobile station 140.

The outputs of data receivers 520, 522, and 526 are provided to diversity combiner and decoder circuitry 538 (i.e., simply diversity combiner). The diversity combiner 538 performs the function of adjusting the timing of a plurality of streams of received signals into alignment and adds them together. In performing this function, the diversity combiner 538 may utilize a maximal ratio diversity combiner technique. The resulting combined signal stream is then decoded using a forward stream error detection contained within the diversity combiner. The decoded result is then passed on to the user digital baseband circuitry 542.

The user digital baseband circuitry 542 typically includes a digital vocoder which decodes the signals from diversity combiner 538, and then outputs the results to a digital to analog (D/A) converter (not shown). The output of the D/A serves as an interface with telephony circuitry for providing mobile station 140 user analog output information signals to the user corresponding to the information provided from diversity combiner 538.

User analog voice signals typically provided through an mobile station 140 are provided as an input to baseband circuitry 542. Baseband 542 serves as an interface with a handset or any other type of peripheral device, to the user for audio communication. Baseband circuitry 542 includes an analog to digital (A/D) converter which converts user information signals from analog form into a digital form. This digital form is then input to a vocoder (not shown) for encoding, which includes a forward error correction function. The resulting encoded signals are then output to transmit modulator 546.

Transmit modulator 546 modulates the encoded signal on a PN carrier signal whose PN sequence is based on the assigned address function for a wireless call. The PN sequence is determined by the control processor 534 from call setup information that was previously transmitted by a cell site BS 122 and decoded by the receivers 520, 522, 524 as one skilled in the art will understand. The output of transmit modulator 546 is provided to transmit power control circuitry 550. Note that signal transmission power is controlled partially by an open-loop analog power control signal provided from receiver 514. In addition, control bits are also transmitted by the controlling BS 122 in the form of a supplemental closed-loop power adjustment command and are processed by data receivers 520, 522. In response to this command, control processor 534 generates a digital power control signal that is provided to the transmit power amplifier 516. Transmit power control 550 also provides the digitized and encoded user information signals in an IF format to output to the transmit power amplifier 516. The transmit power amplifier 516 converts the IF format signals into an RF frequency by mixing this signal with a frequency synthesizer (not shown) output signal for providing a corresponding signal at the proper output transmission frequency signal. Subsequently, transmit power amplifier 516 amplifies the signal to the final power output level. The transmission signal is then output from the transmit power amplifier 516 to the diplexer 512. The diplexer 512 then couples the transmission signal to antenna 510 for air interface transmission to the infrastructure base stations 122.

Additionally, note that control processor 534 is also responsive to various control and information request messages from the controlling BS 122, including for example, sync channel messages, the system parameters messages, in-traffic system parameters messages, paging/alert messages, registration messages, status requests, power control parameters messages and hand-off direction messages, as one skilled in the art will understand.

Referring still to a CDMA mobile station 140, in one embodiment of the present disclosure, the above-described standard CDMA mobile station architecture in an mobile station 140 is sufficient. However, in a second embodiment, this architecture may be modified in minor, cost effective ways so that additional information may be transmitted from an mobile station 140 to the BS 122. The modifications for this second embodiment will now be described. The following modifications, either together or in any combination, provide improvements in location accuracy from the perspective of capturing RF measurement data: (1) increasing measurement quantity, (2) improving measurement transmission, (3) extending the pilot set and search, (4) extending the pilot signal reporting capabilities, (5) decreasing the Quantization size of the units used to report the pilot PN phase arrival time, (6) improving the accuracy of the mobile and base station time reference, and (7) increasing the number of data receivers and related circuitry, for correlation tracking of a larger plurality of pilot channels and each of their multipath signals.

Using the standard system parameters overhead message in the paging channel as one method of reporting to the base station the signal strengths and delays of detectable pilot channels, a mobile station has various timers indicating the upper bounds of time needed to respond to a request, and to bid for access to the forward channel (if not already using it's assigned traffic channel). These timers restrict the frequency of measurement reporting and thus limit the aggregate amount of measurement data which can be sent in a given time period.

For example, CDMA standard timer T_(33m) establishes the maximum time of a mobile station to enter the update overhead information substate of the system access state to respond to messages received while in the mobile station idle state, typically 0.3 seconds. Timer T_(58m), the maximum time for the mobile station to respond to one service option request, is typically 0.2 seconds. Thus during a period of about five seconds, this measurement reporting method would provide for a maximum of about fifteen measurements.

However the same CDMA receiver design infrastructure, with slight circuitry modification can be used to support improved measurement transmission.

In order to collect a data ensemble of RF measurements that represents a statistically significant representation of data values in a geographical area of interest, it is the intention that the second (CDMA) mobile station 140 embodiment be capable of sending to the network base station infrastructure approximately 128 samples of each multipath peak signal strength and its relative delay, for each detectable pilot channel, in less than a preferred period of about five seconds. In order to transmit this amount of data, other means are needed to efficiently send the needed data to the network (i.e., from the mobile station to the base station, and then to forward data to the wireless switch, and then to forward data to the Location Center).

The CDMA air interface standard provides several means for transmitting data at higher rates. The Data Burst message can be used, or various blank-and-burst, dim-and-burst multiplex options can be used, and well as selecting various service options 2 through 9, through the setup of a normal voice or data telephone call. In one embodiment, the user dials a speed number representing a data-type call to the Location Center 142, which initiates a command to the mobile station 140, responsive by the mobile station 140, which then provides the location center 142, via the base station 122, mobile switch center 112 with the needed measurement data.

Referring to FIG. 16, in one embodiment a software controllable data connection or path 49 is established between the control processor 46, and the user digital baseband 30 functional components in the mobile station, a much larger quantity of RF measurements, on the order of 128 data samples, can be transmitted as a data burst, multiplexed, or sent by other means such as a data circuit call, back to the network, and to the Location Center. Note that the existing connection between the control processor 534 and the transmit modulator 546 may also be used, as well via any other virtual path, such as software register-to-register move instructions, as long as sufficient signal measurement content and data samples can be sent to the wireless network and the location center 142 via the associated interfaces. Those skilled in the art will understand the wireless network consists of the base station, mobile switch center, and related infrastructure equipment, interfaces and facilities circuits to telemeter the measurement content and data samples to the location center 142. Additional design issues include, for example, the fact that existing memory in the mobile station must be allocated to the temporary storage of RF sample measurements, and new control means, such as selecting a future use control bit pattern in the CDMA air standard, are required to telemeter, preferably upon command, RF measurement sample data to the Location Center 142 in FIG. 1. In the case where a location request is received by the location engine 139 in the location center 142, the location engine 139 initiates a message to the mobile station 140 via a signal processing subsystem and the location center mobile switch center physical interface, the location applications programming interface 136 (e.g., FIG. 36, L-API-MSC) for the mobile switch center 112 and the wireless network infrastructure.

The addition of a controllable data connection or path 49 can be easily performed by CDMA application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) manufacturers. In the case of one ASIC manufacturer known to the authors, the Qualcomm ASIC chip mobile station modem, model number MSM 2300, provides both the control processor function 534 and the user digital baseband 542 functions or the same chip, thus the external pinout physical configuration would not have to change to accommodate the wireless location software controllable data connection or path 49 modification.

If the mobile station 140 searcher receiver detects 4 pilots with 4 multipaths each, with each measurement consisting of a pilot index, finger identification, multipath signal strength, and multipath arrival time, then about 480 bytes are needed per measurement. Assuming the searcher receiver performs one measurement every 10 microSeconds, about 1 second is needed to compile and buffer each sample of 128 measurements per sample, or about 48 kilobytes. Using a typical 9600 kbps CDMA data channel between the mobile station 140 and a BS 122, and assuming a 50 percent overhead, the mobile station can complete the collection and transmission of a location measurement sample in less than ten seconds, which is within a reasonable period for satisfying a location request.

Network Data Services

The implementation of the data services required to telemeter the necessary signal measurements may be performed in any of several embodiments. In one embodiment the location signal measurements request-response application message set utilizes the air interface services provided by the spare bits and digital control words not currently in the air interface standards IS-95 and ANSI-J-STD-008. Such bits and control words can be reserved for the purpose of requesting and providing the required location signal measurements discussed herein. Using this embodiment the base station and mobile switch center must be modified to support the interworking function required between the location center and the mobile station. In a second embodiment the location signal measurements request-response application message set is implemented using service options 4 and 12, which provides asynchronous data transmission capability, as defined in TR45 Data Standard, Async and Fax Section, document number TIA/EIA/IS-DATA.4. Using this second embodiment, the mobile station control processor provides, or would interface with a function emulating mobile termination 0 or 2 services at the R, network reference point. The L-API 14 then provides, or would interface with a function emulating the physical interface connecting a data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) to the PSTN at the W network reference point, in communication with the PSTN, which is also in communication with reference point Ai, which is in communication with reference point U_(m), which is in turn in communication with reference point R_(m). An advantage of this embodiment is that no ASIC or circuit board modifications are needed in the mobile station.

The ANSI standards J-008 and IS-95 provide several means for the base station 122 to establish and to extend the search window size that the mobile station 140 should use in its scanning process, and to identify further pilots. For location purposes, either existing standard parameters can be extended, or a location message request from the Base station can inform the searcher receiver of the mobile station to extend its search range, as necessary, to capture all relevant base station pilots and their multipath fingers, in order to complete the location measurement sample.

The search performance criteria defined in ANSI IS-98, Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for Dual Mode, can be increased as appropriate to accommodate a larger set of potentially detectable base stations, including Location Base stations and Mobile Base stations. Additionally the search window table size for various search window values must be increased to accommodate new pilot channel pn-offsets associated with Location Base Stations and Mobile Base stations.

Existing standard parameters include, for example using the In-traffic System Parameters Message, the values SRCH_WIN_A (for active and candidate set), SRCH_WIN_N (for neighboring set), and SRCH_SIN_R (for remaining set) can be used to cause the searcher receiver to increase its search area to detect and thus measure as many pilots as can be detected in the area. Extending the range of T_ADD and T_DROP parameters can also be used to facilitate the mobile to retain data on additional pilots in the area. The extended neighbor list message is used to inform the mobile station of the necessary characteristics of neighboring pilot signals. For example if location base stations are used on a different frequency assignment, and/or utilize unique, non-public pilot PN sequence offset indices, for example, in using increments other than 64 PN chips, then the extended neighbor list message can be used to instruct the mobile station to scan for those types of base stations, accordingly.

There can be several combinations of delay spread signal strength measurements made available to the location center, from the mobile station 140. In some cases the mobile station 140 may detect up to three to four pilot channels (representing 3-4 base stations), or as few as one signal from one pilot channel.

For each pilot channel detection case, multiple, up to three to four fingers, or multipath signals may be detected per pilot channel.

Note that multiple multipath signals, or multiple “fingers” could exist from a less-strong BS pilot signal, or in any of several combinations, which can depend widely upon the mobile station's location within the base station environment.

By modifying the CDMA Base station, mobile station and controller capabilities to provide the location center 142 with data that exceeds the 1:1 fingers to data receiver correspondence, additional information can be collected and processed in order to further improve the accuracy of the location estimate. A control message from the location center 142 and carried through the network, is sent to the control processor in the mobile station, requiring the searcher receiver in the mobile station to transmit to the location center 142 via the network, all detectable delay spread fingers related to each detectable pilot channel.

In one embodiment the control message is implemented in the CDMA receiver via a multiplexing technique, including appropriate manipulation of the hand-off parameters T_ADDs, T_DROPs, search window and the active, neighbor and remaining pilot sets held within the mobile station’ memory.

Although the CDMA ANSI J-STD 008 requires reporting of the pilot channel arrival time in a time period of units of one chip size, or 813.802 nanoseconds, typical CDMA receivers contain an internal Quantization interval of one eighth chip size.

Within the mobile station, by modifying the time of arrival message response message to output the delay value in unit increments of one-eighth chip size, the precision of location accuracy can be increased from about 800 feet in radius to about 110 feet. At the base station the arrival time measurement is forwarded in one-eighth units to the Location Center. A multiplier function applied to the received measurement at the base station rescales the measurement for routine CDMA control and monitoring purposes, in order to be consistent with the CDMA standard. In order to distinguish among several mobile station models which report arrival time in either one-eighth chip units or one chip unit sizes, an encoding can be used in the mobile station's hardware or software identifications, telemetered to the base station and Location Center, in order to determine the arrival time measurement units. In one embodiment the analog receiver in the mobile station utilizes a clock signal which runs eight times faster than the clock originally disclosed in the Gilhousen patent, U.S. Pat. No. 5,109,390. In this manner the digital signal provided to the data receivers and the searcher receiver will include an improved resolution in ability to detect delay spread signals, which are directly used to improve wireless location.

Although the CDMA air interface standard only requires a 1,000 nanosecond tolerance accuracy within respect to the base station, location accuracy can be improved if manufacturing calibration precision's are held to within tighter tolerances, such as less than 250 nanoseconds. However in any given location request, as long as the base station to base station tolerances are tuned properly to an amount less than 500 nanoseconds, then very good location estimates can be performed due to the self canceling time effect geometries typically present in multi pilot channel detection found in urban and suburban areas.

Increasing the typical number of data receivers in either the mobile station or base station provide added capabilities to lock and track more delay spread fingers and respective base station pilot channels. The resulting additional information, if available in a given radio coverage area 120 in FIG. 1, can be used for enhanced location estimate accuracy due to confluence or voting methods which can be deployed at the Location system 142.

Fuzzy Logic for Vertical Location

In certain cases wireless location signals are received representing distributed antennas (or other base stations) across building floor boundaries being received from a specific floor on a multi-storied building. As a specific example, consider signals are being received from both the 40th and the 41^(st) floor; the objective is to resolve the ambiguity of the situation. Fuzzy logic is used to resolve this ambiguity. The determination as to which floor the user of the mobile station is on is based on the strength of the signal, S, and the past reliability of the information associated with the two antennae, R. The spaces of S and R are discretized using fuzzy sets. The strength is defined as being: (1) VERY STRONG (VS), (2) STRONG (S), (3) WEAK (W), and (4) VERY WEAK (VW) as defined by membership functions. The reliability of information is defined as being: (1) VERY RELIABLE (VR), (2) RELIABLE (R), and (3) NOT RELIABLE (NR), again as defined by membership functions. A fuzzy relation or mapping is described which descretizes how confident it is that the signal is coming for a given floor, e.g., the 40th floor, using the following notation:

VS S W VW VR 1.0 0.85 0.45 0.2 R 0.85 0.6 0.4 0.1 NR 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.0

The above relation matrix is read, for example, that when the signal information is RELIABLE and the strength is WEAK, then the confidence that the signal is coming from the 40th floor is 0.4. A similar fuzzy relation matrix is established for the distributed antenna on the 41st floor, and thus the result would be a confidence factor associated with the mobile station being located on either floor. A single solution, that is, whether the mobile station is on the 40th or 41st floor is determined using a compositional rule of inference. The compositional rule of inference is a function that prescribes a mechanism for consolidating membership function values into a single crisp function. This function can take a variety of forms including max-min composition, max-product composition. etc. The compositional rule of inference can be implemented, for example, by a summing junction which collects the results of each firing rule. The summing junction's output is then provided to a centroidal defuzzier which provides the discretized output.

FIG. 43 indicates the addition of a fuzzy logic module 41 which optionally discretizes the wireless location estimate output from the TOA/TDOA location estimator module 8. In the above case fuzzy logic rules related to the distributed antenna relation matrix would be fired or activated as a result of examining the message header data structure that indicates that the location estimate was the result of a distributed antenna case around the 40th and 41st floor of a particular building within which such fuzzy relations exist or in any other localized case wherein such fuzzy relations have been predetermined. Otherwise, in cases where no such fuzzy rules apply, the location estimate is passed to the recipient without further discretization.

Note that the confidence associated with the location of the mobile station can be considered a function of several variables, not just the two (S and R) described above. For instance, it would not be unreasonable to segregate the reliability information by time signal delay as determined within the present disclosure. The fuzzy relation is capable of handling a variety of such situations. Thus which floor the mobile station is on can be considered to be a function of numerous variables; the ultimate decision can be made based on a great deal of information.

Location Center—Network Elements Api Description

A location application programming interface 14 (FIG. 1), or L-API, is required between the location system's 142 signal processor 20 and the mobile switch center 12 network element type, in order to send and receive various control, signals and data messages for wireless location purposes. The L-API 14 is implemented using a preferably high-capacity physical layer communications interface, such as IEEE standard 802.3 (10 baseT Ethernet), although other physical layer interfaces could be used, such as fiber optic ATM, frame relay, etc. Two forms of API implementation are possible. In the first case the control signals and data messages are realized using the mobile switch center 112 vendor's native operations messages inherent in the product offering, without any special modifications. In the second case the L-API 14 includes a full suite of commands and messaging content specifically optimized for wireless location purposes, which may require some, although minor development on the part of the mobile switch center vendor. A minimum set of L-API message types includes:

A first message type, an autonomous notification message from the mobile switch center 112 to the location system 142, is required in the event a wireless enhanced 9-1-1 call has been sent to the mobile switch center from a mobile station 140, including the mobile identification number (MIN), along with various CMRS identification and mobile station detected active, candidate, neighbor and remaining pilot set information, pilot strength measurements message.

A second message type, forward path request-response message, from location system 142 to mobile switch center 112, is required to request a mobile station (MS) for signal measurements and hand-off information, with a response message back from the mobile switch center 112 to the location system 142, along with various CMRS identification.

A third message type, Reverse path request-response message, from location system 142 to mobile switch center 112, to a BS for signal measurements received at the BS and hand-off information, for a given mobile station MIN, along with various CMRS identification. It is preferable for the received signal strength measurements performed at the mobile station along the forward path, and at the base station along the reverse path, to be reported in a variable-length data structure as follows: for each pilot channel offset, include the phase of the earliest arriving usable multipath component pilot PN sequence relative to the zero offset pilot PN sequence of this pilot, termed pilot PN phase or pilot arrival, in units of one-eighth PN chip, instead of units of one PN chip as stated in the standards. Furthermore, in accordance with the standards, the pilot strength shall be included, measured based on at most k usable components, where k is the number of demodulating elements supported by the receiver system. In addition the total number of each detectable multipath components shall be reported. In addition each multipath component, for a given pilot, shall be identified by both its delay component and signal strength, for inclusion in the signal measurements to the location system 142. Regarding each individual multipath component, signal strength is expressed as is commonly known, by adding the ratios of received pilot-multipath component energy per chip, E_(c), to total received spectral density (noise and signals), i_(o) of at most that one multipath component (i.e., k is equal to one).

A fourth message type, an autonomous notification message from the mobile switch center 112 to the location system 142 is required, in the event of a mobile station hand-off state change, along with various CMRS identification.

In order to implement additional location functions such as wide area location, wherein location is determined across roaming boundaries, out-of-coverage area conditions or mobile station 140 turned off, and home base station applications, the L-API 14 must include access to and receive data from a data store contained in the home location register (HLR) network element type (e.g., HLR 460, FIG. 39) associated with the mobile switch center 112.

A fifth message type is required which provides the location system 142 with the mobile station MIN, hand-off, along with various CMRS identification information (e.g., old and new state changes, old and new BS identifications, and hand-offs to another CMRS), roaming location and status changes. A typical communications protocol such as Signaling System number 7, running on a V.35 communications channel could be used for implementation, but numerous other protocols (e.g., TCIP/IP, ROSE, CMISE, etc.) could be used to implement this capability. If the home location register is local to the mobile switch center 112 then the LC-mobile switch center communications link could be used, otherwise a separate communications link is used between the location system 142 and the home location register.

A sixth message type, an autonomous notification message type issued from the location system 142 to the home location register, is required for those location applications that rely on an alert from the home location register whenever a particular mobile station state change occurs, along with various CMRS identification. Consider the case wherein a mobile station 140 whose location is to be tracked constantly. In such cases a history of locations is maintained in the location system 142. Should the mobile station 140 user turn off the power, or exit from the coverage area, then by using previous location values a vector and approximate velocity can be determined. This sixth message type provides a notification message from the home location register to the location system 142 whenever a previously identified mobile station MIN has a state change. Examples of state changes include cases where the base station 122 discovers the mobile station 140 has traveled to another base station, or that the current primary base station 122 can no longer communicate with the mobile station 140 (i.e., no power), or that a new registration has occurred. In general this message type should support the notification from the home location register to the location system 142 of all messaging and data associated with the nine types of registration, in the case of CDMA. Specifically these include power-up, power-down, timer-based, distance-based, zone-based, parameter-change, ordered, implicit and traffic channel registration. The location system 142 should also be informed of the registration enablement status of each type of registration, which can be provided to the location system 142 via a redirection of the systems parameters message. It should also be possible (in a seventh message type) for the location system 142 to initiate an ordered registration through an order message, from the location system 142 to the mobile switch center 112. The mobile switch center 112 then shall route the message to the appropriate base station, and then to the mobile station. The location system 142 should also be able to receive the results of the message.

In order to implement additional location functions such as providing users with location information and routing instructions to certain locations via the wireless short message text paging service, an L-API 14 is required between the location system 142 and the network element type used to implement the short message service. Such network elements may be termed an intelligent peripheral or a service node. A number of existing paging interfaces have been proposed in standards bodies, and one or more modifications can be made to accommodate L-API 14 content. In any case, the following L-API addition is required: an eighth message type which allows the location system 142 to send a text message containing location information or instructions to a particular mobile station MIN, and a related message to verify response. Optionally in another, ninth message type, an autonomous message may be provided to alert the location system 142 under conditions wherein a state change occurs on a previously pending text message. This last message type provides improved quality feedback to the initiating party regarding the acceptance situation of the attempted-to-send page.

Utilizing Multiple CMRS Infrastructure in a Shared Coverage Area

As a consequence in practical deployment situations that base stations are not placed in a uniform manner in a geographical area, and the fact that variable and fixed clutter introduce a variety of signal measurements which can result in the provision of an ambiguous location estimation, a novel aspect of this patent includes the utilization of the inherent ability of the wireless protocol and receiver design to request and receive signal measurements along the forward and reverse air interface communications path with a given mobile station and other commercial mobile radio service providers, in cases where multiple service providers share a common coverage area. Thus in a coverage area shared by two service providers A and B, utilization of received signal measurements from both service provider A and service provider B can be used by the location center as unique, orthogonal information to both resolve ambiguous location estimates and to further improve the location estimate accuracy.

The CDMA air interface, for example, provides a soft hand-off capability for the mobile station to hand-off a voice communication channel to another base station, and even to another CMRS provider, termed a hard hand-off.

Referring to FIG. 3, assume three sectored base stations 122 a, 122 b, and 122 c, in communication with mobile switch center-A 112 a, are owned and operated by CMRS provider A. Further, assume three sectored base stations 122 d and 122 e, in communication with mobile switch center-B 112 b, are owned and operated by CMRS provider B, and that the coverage area with CMRS-A and CMRS-B substantially overlap. In order to locate a mobile station 140 whose subscriber normally does business with CMRS provider A, assume that the receiver of mobile station 140 can detect signals from base stations 122 a, 122 b, and 122 c, as well as from base stations 122 d and 122 e, although normal mode use would preclude such measurements from being initiated. Assume further that the resulting location estimate 131 (FIG. 5), generated from the location center 142 contains either an ambiguous location estimate value pair, or otherwise cannot render a location estimate with the desired range of accuracy.

From an inspection of the overall base station geometry of base stations owned by CMRS A and CMRS B it is evident that a strong possibility exists that either 1.) the receivers in mobile station 140 have the possibility to detect the pilot channels associated with base stations 122 d and 122 e; 2.) the receivers in base stations 122 d and 122 e have the possibility to detect the transmitter signal from mobile station 140. The location system 142 contains a data store of both CMRS provider's base station geometries and is in communication with each mobile switch center—A 112 a and mobile switch center—B 112 b. An application in the location system 142 sends a control message to the mobile station 140, instructing the mobile station to tune its searcher receiver to listen for and report back signal measurement data regarding the pilot channel information associated with base stations 122 d and 122 e, in addition to a request to report of pilot signals relative to base stations 122 a, 122 b, and 122 c. Similarly the application in the location system 142 sends messages to each of base stations 122 d and 122 e, with instructions to take signal measurements and report back the resulting information regarding the mobile stations transmitter 140. Since the signaling information from base stations 122 d and 122 e are based on a substantially different location geometry, the resultant information is orthogonal and thus can be used by the location center to provide enhanced location estimates.

If appropriate, a variation of the above process includes a location center initiated forced hard hand-off of the mobile station from a primary base station, e.g., 122 b associated with CMRS-A, to a new primary base station associated with CMRS-B, e.g., 122 d. A forced hand-off will further provide improvements in reducing systemic timing errors which may be inherent among base stations owned by different CMRS. After the appropriate signal measurements have been reported the location system 142 can revert the hand-off back to the original CMRS. Other location system components shown in FIG. 3 include the L-API 14 which includes the location applications programming interface 136 (L-API-MSC) as a communications interface with multiple CMRS mobile switching centers, via physical interfaces 176 a and 176 b.

In order to provide the most economically efficient and accurate wireless location service capabilities among multiple CMRS providers in a shared coverage area, a common location applications programming interface (L-API 14) is highly desirable. A common interface also supports the natural competitive behaviors among wireless consumers and CMRS by providing flexible relationships among consumers who may want to switch service providers, yet retain consistent wireless location services for public safety. This approach minimizes the L-API design and deployment costs among infrastructure vendors and location service providers in a shared coverage area. Based on a L-API between a wireless location center and the mobile switch centers of multiple CMRS, a novel aspect of the present disclosure further includes a method and process that provides account management clearing house and revenue settlement capability with appropriate security management controls. This capability is implemented as wireless location control, accounting and security mediation agent functions to compensate CMRS providers for providing various location-specific network services as described herein.

As wireless location requests are sent to the location center for a given CMRS, operated by a wireless location service provider (WLSP), the location center: 1.) assesses the appropriateness of soliciting additional signal and control measurements from another CMRS' base station in the same coverage area, in order to improve the quality of the location estimate, 2.) accesses, requests and receives signal and control information with another CMRS base station infrastructure, 3.) provides as appropriate a record of compensation entitlement between or among multiple CRMS and WLSPs, and 4.) provides security management controls that protect the privacy needs of wireless customers and the unauthorized sharing of information between or among CMRS. Security controls also include audit trails and controls regarding customer access of their location subscriber profile and the administration of network security processes and related base station parameters and inventory.

Referring to FIG. 5, Location Center-base station access, multiple CMRS, an alternative embodiment is provided to extract the wireless location signal measurement data from each base station associated with each of multiple CMRS. Given base station 122 i and 122 j are operated by CMRS-A and base station 122 k and 122 m are operated by CMRS-B, a communication circuit provides connectivity with the location application programming interface—base station (L-API-BS) (not shown). The L-API-BS is in communication with the L-API 14 in the location center 142. The communications circuit can be any of several conventional transport facilities, such as a private line circuit, a DS-1 or T-1 carrier circuit, frame relay circuit, microwave circuit, or other data communications circuit.

The advantage of this embodiment is that no modifications are required by the infrastructure vendor in terms of the embedded operations circuit, and related functions and systems which otherwise would be needed to telemeter wireless location signal measurement data from the base station to the location center 142. The termination equipment (not shown) in communication with the transport facilities, within each base station typically includes a small computer with an in-circuit connection, such as an ASIC clip-on device, with connections to the control processor circuitry with the base station in the receiver section. The small computer provides a conversion of the signals provided on the in-circuit connection to the ASIC chip, for serialization and transmission to the location center via the transport facilities.

Home Base Station Description

The Home Base station (HBS) concept in the PCS wireless network environment allows a users mobile station to be also used as a low cost cordless phone, whenever the mobile station is physically near (generally within 700-1,000 feet) of a Home Base station Device (HBSD). This enables the user to avoid the typically higher cost air time charges associated with traditional wireless service.

The HBSD is similar to ordinary cordless phone transceiver devices in current use today, but is modified to function with a PCS wireless mobile station. Although the HBSD has been typically used at a residential consumers home, the HBSD could also be used in business settings and other environments.

When a mobile station (MS) is near the HBSD as shown in FIG. 17, and the HBSD detects the presence of a mobile station over the cordless phone air interface, the HBSD signals the Home Location Register (HLR) software in the Service Control Point in the AIN network associated with the mobile station and mobile station's home mobile switch center. The home location register redirects mobile station terminating calls from the network away form the mobile station's mobile identification number in the mobile switch center, and to the AIN/SSP wireline class V switch which connects the wireline number associated with the HBSD. Similarly the HBSD, upon detecting a mobile station call origination attempt, redirects the mobile station signal from a PCS network fixed base station, to the control of the HBSD. The HBSD redirects the mobile station originating call through the wireline network, similar to any other wireline network call.

A reverse scenario occurs whenever the mobile station and HBSD lose communication: the mobile station registers in a wireless PCS network fixed base station, causing redirection of calls to the wireless network. The cordless phone air interface may be of a vendor proprietary design, or it may be a similar design as the CDMA air interface.

In order to perform a location estimate in the HBS concept, a connection is used between the Location Center (LC) and the home location register/HBS application in the SCP. In addition, a new process, termed a Location Notification Process (LNP) within the home location register/SCP is used to send a message to the LC, autonomously whenever a state change occurs in the mobile station’ (either via a specific list of mobile identification numbers or all mobile identification numbers) registration: registering either to a fixed Base station in the Wireless PCS network or to a HBSD.

Alternatively the process may respond to an on-demand message from the LC to the LNP within the home location register/HBS application. In either case a response message from the LNP to the LC provides the information regarding whether or not a mobile station is within range of its, or a designated HBSD. In either case the response message contains a message header information which provides the signal processing subsystem 20 (equivalently this may be known by signal filtering subsystem) with the ability to determine and distribute the information to the HBS First Order Location Estimate Model.

Location Using Distributed Antennas Description

CDMA distributed antennas are useful particularly in system configurations involving microcells, and potentially indoor environments, such as CDMA PBX (private branch exchange) systems in business offices, and in wireless local loop applications. From a mobile station location perspective, the distributed antenna configuration can provide significant improvements in location error, as compared with an indoor mobile station user with a wireless connection to an outdoor, macrocell Base station. Wireless location can be achieved provided certain methods and procedures (M&Ps) are followed during the installation process. Data related to these M&Ps is then used by various location processes discussed elsewhere in the present disclosure.

First, a general description of CDMA distributed antennas is presented, followed by the M&Ps necessary to support wireless location.

In the CDMA distributed antenna concept, a set of simple antennas, placed apart in a given area, similarly to any other cell placement arrangement for coverage objectives, are fed by a common radio signal. Antennas are usually placed such that their coverage patterns are substantially or completely overlapped in area of coverage. From a wireless location perspective, completely overlapping coverage is preferred (this approach also improves perceived signal quality by the end users).

The importance of understanding and characterizing the aggregate system delay elements is shown in FIG. 6: Distributed Antenna Delay Characterization. For any given Pilot Channel offset “I”, additional delay is introduced by the microwave propagation channel (Point A) and any internal repeater/amplifier equipment (Point B). Each of four delay elements t₁ through t₄ introduce further delay. A mobile station detecting all four DA antennas' delayed signals would determine various sets of cumulative system propagation delays. Since each delay is essentially fixed in a location, such information can be used to determine the mobile station location within the building. FIG. 7 illustrates the effective system timing among the delay elements 324, relative to the GPA system time 336, along each point in the diagram shown in FIG. 6.

FIG. 9: One Exemplary DA Configuration, illustrates a typical configuration where the CDMA base station antenna is also directed connected to three delay elements and antenna radiators.

The CDMA Base station transmitter common output signal is fed through a distribution coaxial cable system, optical fibers or other means, to a string of two or more antennas. Each antenna is connected to the distribution cable via a transmission line tap or delay element, which may or may not provide further broadband gain. The transmission system normally consists of two media channels, one for transmit and one for receive signals. FIG. 10 illustrates an Alternative DA Configuration, using multi-point microwave antennas connected to individual delay elements and their respective radiating antennas.

FIG. 11: Serving Dense Multi-level buildings via Virtual Pilots, illustrates a typical application where a multi-level building is served by two base stations with pilot offsets “l” and “j”. Pilot offset “l” serves floor X and pilot offset “j” serves floor Y. As shown, a microwave link, either active or passive, relays the base station signals between the distributed antennas within the building to the base stations.

The main concept is to introduce purposeful delay and multipath signals with sufficient delay spread for signal discrimination. Each antenna radiates a signal which is substantially delayed with respect to any other antenna in the area. If two or more paths are available for the mobile station receivers with greater than one eighth microsecond differential path delay (or whatever resolution is available in the CDMA mobile station receivers), then two or more PN receivers in the same mobile station can be employed to separately receive and combine these signals and thus achieve processing gains through path diversity. Antennas may be omni-directional or directional.

Delay elements may be simple delay lines such as lengths of coaxial cabling, or other active or passive delay elements, such that the combination of components provides the needed delay. The transmission line between the CDMA Base station/PBX and the distributed antennas may be via a pair of dedicated, beam-focused high gain antennas, and/or a repeater system. Provided sufficient delay exists between the multipath signals from separate distributed antennas exists, each Data Receiver within the mobile station tracks the timing of the received signal it is receiving. This is accomplished by the technique of correlating the received signal by a slightly earlier reference PN and correlating the received signal with a slightly late local reference PN. Further distributed antenna details can be seen from Gilhousen, et al, U.S. Pat. No. 5,280,472, assigned to Qualcomm, Inc.

The total measured delay of both forward and reverse link signals between the BS and the mobile station are thus determined naturally by the CDMA radio receiver designs as a part of the multipath tracking process, and can be made available to a location entity for performing location estimates of the mobile station.

However, the measurements of delay between a particular distributed antenna and the mobile station will include the aggregate delay components of several mechanisms, beyond the BS pilot PN offset delay. In the case of distributed antenna configurations, the simple TOA or TDOA model which is based solely of the speed of light, must now be adjusted to account for the purposefully introduced delay.

The mobile station measures the arrival time T_(i), for each pilot l reported to the BS. The pilot arrival time is the time of occurrence, as measured at the mobile station antenna connection, of the earliest arriving usable multipath of the pilot. The arrival time is measured relative to the mobile station’ time reference in units of PN chips. The mobile station computes the reported pilot PN phase f, as: f _(i)=(T _(i)+64×PILOT_(—) PN)mod 2¹⁵,

where PILOT_PN is the PN sequence offset of the pilot.

Reference FIG. 6, which illustrates a typical distributed antenna configuration consisting of a repeater/amplifier and four distributed antennas. The total system delay, T_(i) is: T _(i) =T _(offset) +T ₀ +T _(R) +T ₁ +T ₂ +T ₃ +T ₄

During the installation phase of the high gain antenna (if required), repeater (if required) and the distributed antennas, if the system delay is measured at each distributed antenna and the values stored in a location database, including each antenna identification, and exact physical location (in three dimensions), then during a location request, all fixed delays will be known, thus the TP value can be determined by subtracting the fixed, known delay values from Ti, the measured time of arrival. The TP value can now be used to determine a TOA and or a TDOA value in a manner similar to the non-distributed antenna case, thus location can be determined based on these TOA/TDOA ranging values.

The required installation methods and procedures required to support wireless location are illustrated in FIG. 8: Methods and Procedures for DA Installation. By following these methods, the Location Center (LC) will contain a database populated with the necessary data values to perform accurate location estimates within the building containing the distributed antennas. Table B illustrates typically data element types and values required in the DA location estimate model database. Table DA-11 below illustrates how a simple TOA location estimate model can be used to determine wireless location in a DA environment. Based on the known geometry and coverage areas of each DA cell, and the percentage of maximum radius, determined by the above classification, it is possible to construct radius-radius circles of the DA cells. The intersection of the three circles (in this case) provides the location estimate.

TABLE DA-11 DA Cell Classification and Radius Percentage

In order for the TOA and TDOA location calculations to be determined, it is a necessary condition that during distributed antenna installation, the minimum values of the Delay Elements be set to each exceed the maximum practical (i.e., within the coverage area) TP values be at least 1/2 of a PN chip duration (about 500 nanoseconds), to easily allow for the CDMA Data Receivers to be able to correlate between the delay element values and the TP delay values. FIG. 12: DA Delay Spread Ranges, illustrates typical maximum ranging variable delay values (e.g., up to 1,960 feet) if 500 nanosecond guard zones (t) are used. If larger ranging values are required, then guard zone delays must be increased proportionally.

FIG. 13: DA Cell Layout and Geometry, illustrates, for DA omnicell sizes with a radius of about 2,000 feet and guard zones of 500 nanoseconds, that the minimum required cumulative delay values for the delay elements are: t₂=2.46 microseconds (uS), t₃=4.92 uS, and t₄=7.38 uS, respectively.

It should also be noted that a maximum upper bound exists for the maximum amount of cumulative system propagation delay which can be tolerated by the CDMA mobile station. The total delay cannot exceed an amount that would interfere with the next pilot PN offset, or substantially delay the scanning time of the search receiver in the mobile station. In any case, 30 to 40 microseconds of total delay is acceptable, and would allow for a relatively large number of distributed antenna components to be included, thus no unusual impacts are required of the system to accommodate location methods.

By purposefully introducing a relatively large amount of delay in the distributed antenna delay elements, relative to the maximum permissible TP delay values, it is possible to utilize the large Delay Element values to uniquely identify the distributed antenna ID, and thus via the distributed antenna database, to determine the antennas' exact location. Knowing the antenna's location and TP value (last stage of propagation delay), TOA and TDOA ranging can be achieved, and thus mobile station location within a distributed antenna configuration, can be determined.

FIG. 14: Actual Measurements and Classification, illustrates how CDMA delay spread measurements are used in a DA configuration to form a relationship with the mobile station location with respect to the DA locations. Although the CDMA air interface standard only requires the signal strength and time of arrival of the first useable delay spread signal to be reported from the mobile station to the BS, assume here that the mobile station has the capability to provide the BS, and consequently the LC, with a list of all peak values of CDMA fingers.

Assume that the mobile station detects and telemeters three CDMA finger RF measurements, as shown in the table A below, New Message Type Data Structure Content.

TABLE A New Message Type Data Structure Content. Signal Strength Delay Time of Arrival −77 dBm 1.68 microseconds −66 3.98 −95 9.16

Note that the measurements may be averaged over a sample space of 128 individual measurements. Referring now back to FIG. 14, it can be seen that the first finger is associated with the DA cell-1, range 0 to 1.96 microseconds, and DA cell-2, range 2.46 microseconds to 4.42 microseconds (uS), and DA cell-4, range 7.38 to 9.34 microseconds. Since the DA cell antennas are fixed, with known locations, correlation's can be derived and established to relate actual measurements with locations. Any one of several location estimating models may be used, using the radius-radius method, or multiple invocations of different modules may alternatively be used to form a location estimate of the mobile station within the DA environment.

It is now possible to classify the above actual measurements as propagation delayed signals for the DA cells 1, 2, and 4, since each DA cell delay range is known, and sufficient guard zones exist between delay spread ranges to unambiguously classify the measurements, and thus to determine mobile station location. The following table illustrates a typical database containing the classification columns for each DA cell and their corresponding location in an x,y plane.

TABLE B New Message Type Data Structure Content for Exemplary DA Location Database Records DA Cell Location (X, Y) DA Cell Low Range High Range ID in feet) Radius (microseconds) (In microseconds) 1 (0, 0) 1.96 0 1.96 2  (−20, 3000) 1.96 2.46 4.42 3 (4000, 2800) 1.96 4.92 6.88 4 (1600, 2800) 1.96 7.38 9.34

Translating the actual delay measurements into a percentage of the maximum radius of each cell (i.e., cell 1 radius actual is 88%, cell 2 radius actual is 78%, and cell radius 4 actual is 91%) provides wireless location using familiar radius-radius calculations.

Depending upon the combinations of embodiments, the Location Center and Gateway may contain from one to three interfaces into the digital PCS network, shown as interfaces X, Y, and Z, in FIG. 24, Location and CTIA/TR45 Network Reference Model. Network interface reference points Um, A, Ai, B, C, D and H are part of the Cellular Telecommunications Industry of America (CTIA)/Technical Reference 45 standards, and are not discussed further.

Network interface reference point X provides a direct connection to the mobile switch center, used for transferring RF measurement signals from the mobile station and BS to the LC and for transferring location control between the LS and mobile station, and between the LC and BS. This interface can be implemented via any number of data communications circuit configurations and protocols in current use, such as a T-carrier data circuit, with DSU/CSUs at each end, using an intranet/internet protocol suite, such as TCP/IP, RPC messaging, or other middleware solutions, such as Pipes, IBM MQ series, world wide web protocols, such as JAVA/VRML scripts, hypertext markup language (HTML) links, and may also include various firewall schemes and data encryption mechanisms, etc., in order to communicate asynchronous messaging among the endpoints, and in particular, in reference to the final distribution of the location information to the desired end user.

Network interface reference point Y is used in the embodiment wherein a public switched telephone network interface is required or desired. This interface is a straightforward method to support location applications wherein, for example, a mobile station user dials a telephone number in order to initiate a location request, and could also be used to telemeter RF measurement and location control messages between the LC and the mobile station/BS. Alternatively a timer-initiated process internal to the LC may be used to start a location request, or via any number of events external to the network. Point Y also has the advantage of not requiring a direct connection to a commercial radio mobile service providers' network elements, thus affording a convenient interface for use by third party location service providers unrelated to the commercial radio mobile service provider.

National Scale Wireless Location

By utilizing specific data items used in the Home Location Register in the Advanced Intelligent Network, it is possible to determine the mobile station location on a national scale, i.e., location within the context of a state, and in which city.

Referring now to FIGS. 24 and 25, network interface reference point Z is used in the embodiment wherein a gross location must be determined. A gross location is defined as an area associated with a particular mobile switch center coverage area. Mobile switch center coverage areas are typically bounded by a large metropolitan area, such as a city. The Home Location Register (HLR) contains gross location information. The Z interface allows the LC 142 to query the home location register to determine if the user is in their “home area, or whether the user is roaming to another mobile switch center coverage area, such as another city. IS-41 Cellular Radio Telecommunications intersystem operations communications protocols provide mechanisms that allow a user to roam into authorized areas outside of their “home” area.

If the user is roaming in another area, then the LC 142 can use that information to initiate location control messages toward the CDMA network currently hosting the mobile station user. FIG. 25 illustrates how a user based in Los Angeles, Calif., for example, may roam to a CDMA system in New York City, and be “located” within that metropolitan area, through a data communications network and a national Location Center Clearinghouse system.

Signal Processor Subsystem

The signal processing subsystem receives control messages and signal measurements and transmits appropriate control messages to the wireless network via the location, applications programming interface referenced earlier, for wireless location purposes. The signal processing subsystem additionally provides various signal identification, conditioning and pre-processing functions, including buffering, signal type classification, signal filtering, message control and routing functions to the location estimate modules.

There can be several combinations of Delay Spread/Signal Strength sets of measurements made available to the signal processing subsystem 20 within the Location Center/System 142, shown in FIG. 3. In some cases the mobile station 140 may be able to detect up to three or four Pilot Channels representing three to four Base Stations, or as few as one Pilot Channel, depending upon the environment. Similarly, possibly more than one BS 122 can detect a mobile station 140 transmitter signal, as evidenced by the provision of cell diversity or soft hand-off in the CDMA standards, and the fact that multiple CMRS' base station equipment commonly will overlap coverage areas. For each mobile station 140 or BS 122 transmitted signal detected by a receiver group at a station, multiple delayed signals, or “fingers” may be detected and tracked resulting from multipath radio propagation conditions, from a given transmitter.

In typical spread spectrum diversity CDMA receiver design, the “first” finger represents the most direct, or least delayed multipath signal. Second or possibly third or fourth fingers may also be detected and tracked, assuming the mobile station contains a sufficient number of data receivers. Although traditional TOA and TDOA methods would discard subsequent fingers related to the same transmitted finger, collection and use of these additional values can prove useful to reduce location ambiguity, and are thus collected by the Signal Processing subsystem in the Location Center 142.

For each pilot channel detection case, multiple fingers (up to three or four) may be detected and thus reported to the Location system 142, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, for dense urban and rural settings, respectively. From the mobile receiver's perspective, a number of combinations of measurements could be made available to the Location Center. Table SP-1 illustrates the available combinations for three and four receiver cases, respectively.

TABLE SP-1 Nominal CDMA Location Measurement Combinations No. of No. of No. of No. of No. of Fingers, BS Fingers, BS Fingers, BS Fingers, 4-S No. of No. of BSs Fingers 1-S (first 2-S (second 3-S (third (fourth Receivers detected Detected strongest) strongest) strongest) Strongest 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 3 1 2 2 0 0 0 3 1 3 3 0 0 0 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 3 2 3 2 1 0 0 3 2 3 1 2 0 0 3 3 3 1 1 1 0 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 4 3 4 1 2 1 0 4 3 4 1 2 1 0 4 3 4 2 1 1 0 4 2 4 3 1 0 0 4 2 4 2 2 0 0 4 2 4 1 3 0 0 4 1 4 4 0 0 0

The above Table SP-1 scenario assumes that the mobile station design and data collection structure only permits a 1:1 correspondence to exist between the number of base stations detected and the number of data receivers reporting multipath CDMA fingers.

Table SP-1 illustrates the potential combinations of detected CDMA signals representing multipath fingers and total number of detectable base station pilot signals in a given location within the radio coverage area 120. Due to the disperse and near-random nature of CDMA radio signals and propagation characteristics, traditional TOA/TDOA location methods have failed in the past, because the number of signals received in different locations area different. In a particularly small urban area, say less than 500 square feet, the number of RF signals and there multipath components may vary by over 100 percent.

FIGS. 18 and 19 illustrate a certain case from a location measurement perspective, of signals received for a three-data receiver and a four-data receiver configuration, in a nominal three sector honeycomb base station configuration. In FIG. 18, a mobile station at location “A” detects base stations 1b, 5c, and 4a. However although a triad of signals are received, if varying multipath signals are received from one or more base stations, then ambiguity can still result. FIG. 19 illustrates a mobile station located at position “A”, detecting base stations 1b, 5c, 4a, and 2c. Although additional information is made available in this second case, traditional hyperbolic combinations taken three at a time, yield multiple location estimates. In certain cases the limit of the back-side of a “far-away” sectored antenna can be used to determine the limit of RF coverage in another base station sector area. FIG. 20 shows that normally a delay spread in sector 1b would imply a range of a 120 degree solid angle. However by using the known fact that base station sector 2a contains a coverage limit, such negative logic can be used to further restrict the apparent coverage area in sector 1b, from 120 degrees to approximately 90 degrees as shown in the illustration, in order to locate the mobile station B. Such information regarding sector 2a can be determined by collecting the remaining set information from mobile station B.

Now consider more practical, less ideal cases. Due to the large capital outlay costs associated with providing three or more overlapping base station coverage signals in every possible location, most practical digital PCS deployments result in fewer than three base station pilot channels being reportable in the majority of location areas, thus resulting in a larger, more amorphous location estimate. FIGS. 20 and 21 illustrate a typical relative error space wherein a mobile station detects only two base station pilot channels, and only one pilot channel, respectively. This consequence requires a family of location estimate location modules or models, each firing whenever suitable data has been presented to a model, thus providing a location estimate to a backend subsystem which resolves ambiguities.

In one embodiment of the present disclosure uses backend hypothesis resolution, by utilizing existing knowledge concerning base station coverage area boundaries (such as via the compilation a RF coverage database—either via RF coverage area simulations or field tests), the location error space is decreased. Negative logic Venn diagrams can be generated which deductively rule out certain location estimate hypotheses.

Base Station Cell site planning tools which utilize antenna gain radiation patterns, environmental clutter, such as buildings, dense forests, terrain heights, etc., can provide reasonable training data to bootstrap the initial operation of the LC.

An example of the types of data typically collected during field tests/runs is shown in the following database table SP-2 below:

TABLE SP-2 Typical CDMA Field Test Measurements Column Position Mobile Data Test Set: Data Type Logged 1 CDMA Time (absolute, from GPS) 2 Vehicle Speed (in mph) 3 Vehicle Latitude (in deg. North) 4 Vehicle Longitude (in deg. East) 5 GPS Source (binary, e.g., GPS or Dead Reckoning) 6 GPS Data available indicator (binary states) 7 First BS-Mobile Received Power (in dBm, 1 second averages) 8 Mobile transmit Gain Adjust (in dBm, 1 second average) 9 First BS Mobile Rx Pilot E_(c)/I_(o) (dB, 1 second average) 10 First BS Mobile received Frame Counts (integers per measurement period) 11 Mobile Finger's Average Time Separation (in nano/microseconds) 12 Mobile Fingers' Maximum Time Separation (in nano/microseconds) 13 Mobile Fingers' Number of Pilots locked (per 1 second average) 14 Mobile finger Lock Counts 15 First BS Received Frame Counts 16 First BS Eb/No set Point (in dB, 1 second average) 17 First BS cell Rx Eb/No per antenna (in dB, 1 second average) 18 Hand-off State (relative to the First, or connected-to BS) 19 First BS Traffic Channel Gain 20 First BS Power Control Subchannel Gain 21 First BS Reverse Link full Frame Error Rate, over 500 frames 22 Forward Link full Frame Error Rate, over 500 frames 23 First BS Pilot Channel Delay Spread (in nanoseconds) 24 Second BS-Ranked Pilot Delay Spread (in nanoseconds) 25 Second BS-Ranked Pilot Relative Signal Strength (in dB) 26 Third BS-Ranked Pilot Delay Spread 27 Third BS-Ranked Pilot Relative Signal Strength (in dB) 28 Mobile Antenna Identification (in the case of a multi-sectored antenna) 29 Vehicle compass orientation (bearing or heading) 30 Mobile Station Power Class (an integer, 0-7, indicating max. power capabilities of the mobile station transmitter)

Although the forward link mobile station's received relative signal strength (RRSS_(BS)) of detected nearby base station transmitter signals can be used directly by the location estimate modules, the base station's reverse link received relative signal strength (RRSS_(MS)) of the detected mobile station transmitter signal must be modified prior to location estimate model use, since the mobile station transmitter power level changes nearly continuously, and would thus render relative signal strength useless for location purposes.

One adjustment variable and one factor value are required by the signal processing subsystem: 1.) instantaneous relative power level in dBm (IRPL) of the mobile station transmitter, and 2.) the mobile station Power Class. By adding the IRPL to the RRSS_(MS), a synthetic relative signal strength (SRSS_(MS)) of the mobile station 140 signal detected at the BS 122 is derived, which can be used by location estimate model analysis, as shown below: SRSS_(MS)=RRSS_(MS)+IRPL (in dBm)

SRSS_(MS), a corrected indication of the effective path loss in the reverse direction (mobile station to BS), is now comparable with RRSS_(BS) and can be used to provide a correlation with either distance or shadow fading because it now accounts for the change of the mobile station transmitter's power level. The two signals RRSS_(BS) and SRSS_(MS) can now be processed in a variety of ways to achieve a more robust correlation with distance or shadow fading.

Although Rayleigh fading appears as a generally random noise generator, essentially destroying the correlation value of either RRSS_(BS) or SRSS_(MS) measurements with distance individually, several mathematical operations or signal processing functions can be performed on each measurement to derive a more robust relative signal strength value, overcoming the adverse Rayleigh fading effects. Examples include averaging, taking the strongest value and weighting the strongest value with a greater coefficient than the weaker value, then averaging the results. Regarding input to a neural net, both measurements can be input, along with the MS Power Class, for training and estimating purposes. This signal processing technique takes advantage of the fact that although a Rayleigh fade may often exist in either the forward or reverse path, it is much less probable that a Rayleigh fade also exists in the reverse or forward path, respectively. A shadow fade however, similarly affects the signal strength in both paths.

At this point a CDMA radio signal direction-independent “net relative signal strength measurement” is derived which is used to establish a correlation with either distance or shadow fading, or both. Although the ambiguity of either shadow fading or distance cannot be determined, other means can be used in conjunction, such as the fingers of the CDMA delay spread measurement, and any other TOA/TDOA calculations from other geographical points. In the case of a mobile station with a certain amount of shadow fading between its BS 122 (FIG. 2), the first finger of a CDMA delay spread signal is most likely to be a relatively shorter duration than the case where the mobile station 140 and BS 122 are separated by a greater distance, since shadow fading does not materially affect the arrival time delay of the radio signal.

By performing a small modification in the control electronics of the CDMA base station and mobile station receiver circuitry, it is possible to provide the signal processing subsystem 20 (reference FIG. 1) within the Location system 142 (FIG. 1) with data that exceed the one-to-one CDMA delay-spread fingers to data receiver correspondence. Such additional information, in the form of additional CDMA fingers (additional multipath) and all associated detectable pilot channels, provides new information which is used to enhance to accuracy of the Location Center's location estimate location estimate modules.

This enhanced capability is provided via a control message, sent from the Location system 142 to the mobile switch center 12, and then to the base station(s) 122 (FIG. 2) in communication with, or in close proximity with, mobile stations 140 to be located. Two types of location measurement request control messages are needed: one to instruct a target mobile station 140 (i.e., the mobile station to be located) to telemeter its BS pilot channel measurements back to the primary BS 122 and from there to the mobile switch center 112 and then to the location system 142. The second control message is sent from the location system 142 to the mobile switch center 112, then to first the primary BS 122, instructing the primary BS′ searcher receiver to output (i.e., return to the initiating request message source) the detected target mobile station 140 transmitter CDMA pilot channel offset signal and their corresponding delay spread finger (peak) values and related relative signal strengths.

The control messages are implemented in standard mobile station 140 and BS 122 CDMA receivers such that all data results from the search receiver and multiplexed results from the associated data receivers are available for transmission back to the Location Center 142. Appropriate value ranges are required regarding mobile station 140 parameters T_ADD_(s), T_DROP_(s), and the ranges and values for the Active, Neighboring and Remaining Pilot sets registers, held within the mobile station 140 memory. Further mobile station 140 receiver details have been discussed above.

In the normal case without any specific multiplexing means to provide location measurements, exactly how many CDMA pilot channels and delay spread fingers can or should be measured vary according to the number of data receivers contained in each mobile station 140.

As a guide, it is preferred that whenever RF characteristics permit, at least three pilot channels and the strongest first three fingers, are collected and processed.

From the BS 122 perspective, it is preferred that the strongest first four CDMA delay spread fingers and the mobile station power level be collected and sent to the location system 142, for each of preferably three BSs 122 which can detect the mobile station 140.

Table SP-3 illustrates the resulting extended combinations of BS signals (pilot channels) and finger measurements potentially available, based on the above preferred conditions. The philosophy is to collect as much reasonable data as is practical, given the constraints of CDMA receivers, search times, receiver memory storage and available CPU and data transmission bandwidth, in order that sufficient orthogonal information can be processed to minimize location estimate error.

TABLE SP-3 Extended CDMA Location Measurement Combinations No. of No. of No. of No. of No. of No. of Fingers, BS Fingers, BS Fingers, BS Fingers, 4-S No. of BSs Fingers 1-S (first 2-S (second 3-S (third (fourth Receivers detected Detected strongest) strongest) strongest) Strongest 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 3 1 2 2 0 0 0 3 1 3 3 0 0 0 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 3 2 3 2 1 0 0 3 2 3 1 2 0 0 3 2 4 2 2 0 0 3 2 5 2 3 0 0 3 2 5 3 2 0 0 3 2 4 3 1 0 0 3 2 4 1 3 0 0 4 2 5 4 1 0 0 4 2 5 1 4 0 0 3 3 3 1 1 1 0 3 2 6 3 3 0 0 3 3 3 1 1 1 0 3 3 4 2 1 1 0 3 3 4 1 2 1 0 3 3 4 1 1 2 0 3 3 5 2 2 1 0 3 3 5 2 1 2 0 3 3 5 1 2 2 0 3 3 6 2 2 2 0 3 3 6 3 2 1 0 3 3 6 2 3 1 0 3 3 6 1 2 3 0 3 3 6 1 3 2 0 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 4 4 5 2 1 1 1 4 4 5 1 2 1 1 4 4 5 1 1 2 1 4 4 5 1 1 1 2 4 4 6 2 2 1 1 4 4 6 2 1 2 1 4 4 6 1 1 2 2 4 4 6 1 2 2 1 4 4 6 1 2 1 2 4 4 6 2 1 1 2 4 4 7 3 2 1 1 4 4 7 3 1 2 1 4 4 7 2 3 1 1 4 4 7 2 1 3 1 4 4 7 2 1 1 3 4 4 7 1 3 2 1 4 4 7 1 2 3 1 4 4 7 1 1 2 3 4 4 7 1 1 3 2 4 4 7 3 1 1 2 4 4 <13 . . . . . . . . . . . .

As can be seen from the table, a much larger combination of measurements is potentially feasible using the extended data collection capability of the CDMA receivers. In the case of the last row shown, additional combinations are also possible using a similar scheme of allocating the number of CDMA fingers detected at the first or strongest BS, followed by the second strongest base station, then the third strongest base station, etc.

FIG. 29 illustrates the components of the Signal Processing Subsystem 20. The main components consist of the input queue(s) 7, signal classifier/filter 9, digital signaling processor 17, imaging filters 19, output queue(s) 21, router/distributor 23, a signal processor database 26 and a signal processing controller 15.

Input queue(s) 7 are required in order to stage the rapid acceptance of a significant amount of RF signal measurement data, used for either location estimate purposes or to accept autonomous location data. Each location request using fixed base stations may, in one embodiment, contain from 1 to 128 radio frequency measurements from the mobile station, which translates to approximately 61.44 kilobytes of signal measurement data to be collected within 10 seconds and 128 measurements from each of possibly four base stations, or 245.76 kilobytes for all base stations, for a total of approximately 640 signal measurements from the five sources, or 307.2 kilobytes to arrive per mobile station location request in 10 seconds. An input queue storage space is assigned at the moment a location request begins, in order to establish a formatted data structure in persistent store. Depending upon the urgency of the time required to render a location estimate, fewer or more signal measurement samples can be taken and stored in the input queue(s) 7 accordingly.

The signal processing subsystem 20 supports a variety of wireless network signaling measurement capabilities by detecting the capabilities of the mobile and base station through messaging structures provided by the location application programming interface 14 in FIG. 1. Detection is accomplished in the signal classifier 9 (FIG. 29) by referencing a mobile station database table within the signal processor database 26, which provides, given a mobile station identification number, mobile station revision code, other mobile station characteristics. Similarly, a mobile switch center table 31 provides MSC characteristics and identifications to the signal classifier/filter 9. The signal classifier/filter 9 adds additional message header information that further classifies the measurement data which allows the digital signal processor and image filter components to select the proper internal processing subcomponents to perform operations on the signal measurement data, for use by the location estimate modules.

Regarding service control point messages autonomously received from the input queue 7, the signal classifier/filter 9 determines via a signal processing database 26 query that the message is to be associated with a home base station module. Thus appropriate header information is added to the message, thus enabling the message to pass through the digital signal processor 17 unaffected to the output queue 21, and then to the router/distributor 23. The router/distributor 23 then routes the message to the HBS module 6 shown in FIG. 1. Those skilled in the art will understand that associating location requests from Home Base Station configurations require substantially less data: the mobile identification number and the associated wireline telephone number transmission from the home location register are on the order of less than 32 bytes. Consequentially the home base station message type could be routed without any digital signal processing.

Output queue(s) 21 are required for similar reasons as input queues 7: relatively large amounts of data must be held in a specific format for further location processing by the location estimate modules.

The router and distributor component 23 is responsible to directing specific signal measurement data types and structures to their appropriate modules. For example, the HBS module has no use for digital filtering structures, whereas the TDOA module would not be able to process an HBS response message.

The controller 15 is responsible for staging the movement of data among the signal processing subsystem 20 components input queue 7, digital signal processor 17, router/distributor 23 and the output queue 21, and to initiate signal measurements within the wireless network, in response from an internet 468 location request message in FIG. 1, via the location application programming interface 14.

In addition the controller 15 receives autonomous messages from the MSC, via the location applications programming interface 14 (FIG. 1) or L-API and the input queue 7, whenever a 9-1-1 wireless call is originated. The mobile switch center provides this autonomous notification to the location system as follows: By specifying the appropriate mobile switch center operations and maintenance commands to surveil calls based on certain digits dialed such as 9-1-1, the location applications programming interface 14 (FIG. 1), in communication with the MSC 112 a and/or 112 b in FIG. 1, receives an autonomous notification whenever a mobile station user dials 9-1-1. Specifically, a bi-directional authorized communications port is configured, usually at the operations and maintenance subsystem of the MSC 112 a and/or 112 b in FIG. 1, or with their associated network element manager system(s), with a data circuit, such as a DS-1, with the location applications programming interface 14 in FIG. 1. Next, the “call trace” capability of the mobile switch center is activated for the respective communications port. The exact implementation of the vendor-specific man-machine or Open Systems Interface (OSI) commands(s) and their associated data structures generally vary among MSC vendors, however the trace function is generally available in various forms, and is required in order to comply with Federal Bureau of Investigation authorities for wire tap purposes. After the appropriate surveillance commands are established on the MSC, such 9-1-1 call notifications messages containing the mobile station identification number (MIN) and, in FCC phase 1 E9-1-1 implementations, a pseudo-automatic number identification (a.k.a. pANI) which provides an association with the primary base station in which the 9-1-1 caller is in communication, are communicated. In cases where the pANI is known from the onset, the signal processing subsystem 20 avoids querying the MSC in question to determine the primary base station identification associated with the 9-1-1 mobile station caller.

After the signal processing controller 15 receives the first message type, the autonomous notification message from the mobile switch center 112 to the location system 142, containing the mobile identification number and optionally the primary base station identification, the controller 15 queries the base station table 13 in the signal processor database 26 to determine the status and availability of any neighboring base stations, including those base stations of other CMRS in the area. The definition of neighboring base stations include not only those within a provisionable “hop” based on the cell design reuse factor, but also includes, in the case of CDMA, results from remaining set information autonomously queried to mobile stations, with results stored in the base station table. Remaining set information indicates that mobile stations can detect other base station (sector) pilot channels which may exceed the “hop” distance, yet are nevertheless candidate base stations (or sectors) for wireless location purposes. Although cellular and digital cell design may vary, “hop” distance is usually one or two cell coverage areas away from the primary base station's cell coverage area.

Having determined a likely set of base stations which may both detect the mobile station's transmitter signal, as well as to determine the set of likely pilot channels (i.e., base stations and their associated physical antenna sectors) detectable by the mobile station in the area surrounding the primary base station (sector), the controller 15 initiates messages to both the mobile station and appropriate base stations (sectors) to perform signal measurements and to return the results of such measurements to the signal processing system regarding the mobile station to be located. This step may be accomplished via several interface means. In a first case the controller 15 utilizes, for a given MSC, predetermined storage information in the MSC table 31 to determine which type of commands, such as man-machine or OSI commands are needed to request such signal measurements for a given MSC 112 a or 112 b in FIG. 1. The controller generates the mobile and base station signal measurement commands appropriate for the MSC and passes the commands via the input queue 7 and the locations application programming interface 14 in FIG. 1, to the appropriate MSC 112 a and 112 b, using the authorized communications port mentioned earlier. In a second case the controller 15 communicates directly with the base stations as discussed above and shown in FIG. 5, Location Center-base station access, multiple CMRS. In this second case, an alternative embodiment is provided to directly extract the wireless location signal measurement data from each base station associated with each of the multiple CMRS networks having to interface directly with the MSC for signal measurement extraction.

Upon receipt of the signal measurements, the signal classifier 9 (e.g., FIG. 29) examines location application programming interface-provided message header information from the source of the location measurement (for example, from a fixed BS 122, a mobile station 140, a distributed antenna system 168 or message location data related to a home base station), provided by the location applications programming interface (L-API 14) via the input queue 7 and determines whether or not device filters of the digital signal processor 17 or image filters 19 are needed, and assesses a relative priority in processing, such as an emergency versus a background location task, in terms of grouping like data associated with a given location request. In the case where multiple signal measurement requests are outstanding for various base stations, some of which may be associated with a different CMRS network, an additional signal classifier function includes sorting and associating the appropriate incoming signal measurements together such that the digital signal processor 17 processes related measurements in order to build ensemble data sets. Such ensembles allow for a variety of functions such as averaging, outlier removal over a time period, and related filtering functions, and further prevent association errors from occurring in location estimate processing.

Another function of the signal classifier/low pass filter component 9 is to filter information that is not useable, or information that could introduce noise or the effect of noise in the location estimate modules. Consequently low pass matching filters are used to match the in-common signal processing components to the characteristics of the incoming signals. Low pass filters match: Mobile Station, base station, CMRS and MSC characteristics, as well as to classify Home Base Station messages.

The signal processing subsystem 20 in FIG. 1 contains a base station database table 13 (FIG. 29) which captures the maximum number of CDMA delay spread fingers for a given base station, containing information structures as shown in table SP-4 below:

TABLE SP-4 Base Station Characteristics Primary Base Latitude, Pilot BS Maximum No. Station Longitude, Channel Identifier of CDMA Identification elevation Offset code Fingers DEN-001 x, y, z 5 CODENABC001 4 DEN-002 p, q, r 25 CODENABC002 4 DEN-003 s, t, u 20 CODENABC003 3 DEN-004 a, b, c 15 CODENABC004 4 BLD-005 d, e, f 45 COBLDABC005 4

The base station identification code, or CLLI or common language level identification code is useful in identifying or relating a human-labeled name descriptor to the Base Station. Latitude, Longitude and elevation values are used by other subsystems in the location system for calibration and estimation purposes. As base stations and/or receiver characteristics are added, deleted, or changed with respect to the network used for location purposes, this database table must be modified to reflect the current network configuration.

Just as an upgraded base station may detect additional CDMA delay spread signals, newer or modified mobile stations may detect additional pilot channels or CDMA delay spread fingers. Additionally different makes and models of mobile stations may acquire improved receiver sensitivities, suggesting a greater coverage capability. The table below establishes the relationships among various mobile station equipment suppliers and certain technical data relevant to the present disclosure.

Although not strictly necessary, the MIN can be populated in this table from the PCS Service Provider's Customer Care system during subscriber activation and fulfillment, and could be changed at deactivation, or anytime the end-user changes mobile stations. Alternatively, since the MIN, manufacturer, model number, and software revision level information is available during a telephone call, this information could extracted during the call, and the remaining fields populated dynamically, based on manufacturer's specifications information previously stored in the signal processing subsystem 20. Default values are used in cases where the MIN is not found, or where certain information must be estimated.

TABLE SP-5 Mobile Station Characteristics Table Maximum Rec. Allowed Maximum No. Transmit Thermal Mobile Station S/W No. of of Power Noise Identification Model Revision CDMA Pilots Class Floor (MIN) Manufacturer No. Levels Fingers Detectable (Max) (dBm) 3034561234567 Sony  5 R1.0 3 3 2 −114 3034561234568 Qualcomm 25 R2.01 4 4 4 −115 3034561234569 Panasonic 20 R1.1 3 3 5 −113 3034561234570 Fujutshu 15 R2.5 4 4 0 −116 3034561234571 Sony 45 R1.1 3 3 7 −115 Default Default Default R1.0 3 3 3 −112

A low pass mobile station filter, contained within the signal classifier/low pass filter 9 of the signal processing subsystem 20, uses the above table data to perform the following functions: 1) act as a low pass filter to adjust the nominal assumptions related to the maximum number of CDMA fingers, pilots detectable; and 2) to determine the transmit power class and the receiver thermal noise floor. Given the detected reverse path signal strength, the required value of SRSS_(MS), a corrected indication of the effective path loss in the reverse direction (mobile station to BS), can be calculated based on the SP-5 table data contained within the mobile station table 11, in the signal processing database 26.

The effects of the maximum Number of CDMA fingers allowed and the maximum number of pilot channels allowed essentially form a low pass filter effect, wherein the least common denominator of characteristics are used to filter the incoming RF signal measurements such that a one for one matching occurs. The effect of the Transmit Power Class and Receiver Thermal Noise floor values is to normalize the characteristics of the incoming RF signals with respect to those RF signals used.

FIG. 4, Location Provisioning from Multiple CMRSs, illustrates a system architecture to enable the customer care systems belonging to different CMRSs, either on an autonomous or periodic basis, to update a provisionable signal processing database 26, containing the mobile station characteristics, in communication with the signal classifier/filter 9, input queue 7, and the location applications programming interface for customer care systems (L-API-CCS) 138. The signal classifier/filter 9 is in communication with both the input queue 7 and the signal processing database 26. In the early stage of a location request the signal processing subsystem 20 in FIG. 4, will receive the initiating location request from either an autonomous 9-1-1 notification message from a given MSC, or from a location application 146 (for example, see FIGS. 36, 38, 39, 40 and 42), for which mobile station characteristics about the target mobile station 140 (FIG. 2) is required. Referring to FIG. 29, a query is made from the signal processing controller 15 to the signal processing database 26, specifically the mobile station table 11, to determine if the mobile station characteristics associated with the MIN to be located are available in table 11. If the data exists then there is no need for the controller 15 to query the wireless network in order to determine the mobile station characteristics, thus avoiding additional real-time processing which would otherwise be required across the air interface, in order to determine the mobile station MIN characteristics. The resulting mobile station information may be provided either via the signal processing database 26 or alternatively a query may be performed directly from the signal processing subsystem 20 to the MSC in order to determine the mobile station characteristics.

A location application programming interface, L-API-CCS 138 to the appropriate CMRS customer care system provides the mechanism to populate and update the mobile station table 11 within the database 26. The L-API-CCS 138 contains its own set of separate input and output queues or similar implementations and security controls to ensure that provisioning data is not sent to the incorrect CMRS. The interface 1155 a to the customer care system for CMRS-A 1150 a provides an autonomous or periodic notification and response application layer protocol type, consisting of add, delete, change and verify message functions in order to update the mobile station table 11 within the signal processing database 26, via the controller 15. A similar interface 1155 b is used to enable provisioning updates to be received from CMRS-B customer care system 1150 b.

Although the L-API-CCS application message set may be any protocol type which supports the autonomous notification message with positive acknowledgment type, the T1M1.5 group within the American National Standards Institute has defined a good starting point in which the L-API-CCS could be implemented, using the robust OSI TMN X-interface at the service management layer. The object model defined in Standards proposal number T1M1.5/96-22R9, Operations Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P)—Model for Interface Across Jurisdictional Boundaries to Support Electronic Access Service Ordering: Inquiry Function, can be extended to support the L-API-CCS information elements as required and further discussed below. Other choices in which the L-API-CCS application message set may be implemented include ASCII, binary, or any encrypted message set encoding using the Internet protocols, such as TCP/IP, simple network management protocol, http, https, and email protocols.

Referring to the digital signal processor (DSP) 17, in communication with the signal classifier/LP filter 9, the DSP 17 provides a time series expansion method to convert non-HBS data from a format of an signal measure data ensemble of time-series based radio frequency data measurements, collected as discrete time-slice samples, to a three dimensional matrix location data value image representation. Other techniques further filter the resultant image in order to furnish a less noisy training and actual data sample to the location estimate modules.

Referring now to digital signal and image filter processing, by way of example, a forward-path CDMA mobile station delay spread RF measurement sample is illustrated in FIG. 22, for the mobile station reception of one sample of transmission signal related to BS-1, located at 16th and Stout Streets. In this sample three fingers or groups of RF energy (relative signal strength is indicated along the vertical axis) were detected. A first CDMA finger was found at a delay of about 3.4 microseconds, and relative signal strength of about −80 dBm. A second finger was found at a delay of about 5 microseconds, and peak strength of about −55 dBm, followed by a third finger at 6.5 microseconds and a strength of about −92 dBm. Two other base stations were detected, BS-5 and BS-2, along with their respective three CDMA delay spread fingers.

Refer now to the left image shown in FIG. 26: Delay Spread Profile Image. After 128 samples of data are collected of the delay spread-relative signal strength RF data measurement sample: mobile station RX for BS-1 and grouped into a Quantization matrix, where rows constitute relative signal strength intervals and columns define delay intervals. As each measurement row, column pair (which could be represented as a complex number or Cartesian point pair) is added to their respective values to generate a Z direction of frequency of recurring measurement value pairs or a density recurrence function. By next applying a grid function to each x, y, and z value, a three-dimensional surface grid is generated, which represents a location data value or unique print of that 128-sample measurement. FIG. 28 illustrates the result of image generation when a number of data samples, or an ensemble of signal strength, delay pairs of values are added within a given bin area or matrix, to thus create a type of three-dimensional image, representing a particular RF signaling behavior at a given location.

Refer now to the right image shown in FIG. 26. In the general case where a mobile station is located in an environment with varied clutter patterns, such as terrain undulations, unique man-made structure geometries (thus creating varied multipath signal behaviors), such as a city or suburb, although the first CDMA delay spread finger may be the same value for a fixed distance between the mobile station and BS antennas, as the mobile station moves across such an arc, different finger-data are measured. In the right image for the defined BS antenna sector, location classes, or squares numbered one through seven, are shown across a particular range of line of position (LOP).

A traditional TOA/TDOA ranging method between a given BS and mobile station only provides a range along the arc, thus introducing ambiguity error. However a unique three dimensional image can be used in this method to specifically identify, with recurring probability, a particular unique location class along the same Line Of Position, as long as the multipath is unique by position but generally repeatable, thus establishing a method of not only ranging, but also of complete latitude, longitude location estimation in a Cartesian space. In other words, the unique shape of the “mountain image” enables a correspondence to a given unique location class along a line of position, thereby eliminating traditional ambiguity error.

Although man-made external sources of interference, Rayleigh fades, adjacent and co-channel interference, and variable clutter, such as moving traffic introduce unpredictability (thus no “mountain image” would ever be exactly alike), three basic types of filtering methods can be used to reduce matching/comparison error from a training case to a location request case: 1.) select only the strongest signals from the forward path (BS to mobile station) and reverse path (mobile station to BS), 2.) Convolute the forward path 128 sample image with the reverse path 128 sample image, and 3.) process all image samples through various digital image filters to discard noise components.

The strongest signal technique has been discussed previously in the data filter section. FIG. 27: Convolution of Forward and Reverse Images, illustrates one method that essentially nulls noise completely, even if strong and recurring, as long as that same noise characteristic does not occur in the opposite path.

The third technique of processing CDMA delay spread profile images through various digital image filters, provides a resultant “image enhancement” in the sense of providing a more stable pattern recognition paradigm to the neural net location estimate model (e.g., the “N/N Model” of FIG. 49(1) identifies an artificial neural network FOM). For example, image histogram equalization can be used, as illustrated in FIG. 30 (before equalization) and 31 (after equalization) to rearrange the images' intensity values, or density recurrence values, so that the image's cumulative histogram is approximately linear.

Other methods which can be used to compensate for a concentrated histogram include: 1) Input Cropping, 2) Output Cropping and 3) Gamma Correction. Equalization and input cropping can provide particularly striking benefits to a CDMA delay spread profile image. FIGS. 32 and 33 illustrate the three dimensional grid images of the before and after input cropping filter example. As shown in FIG. 33, input cropping removes a large percentage of random signal characteristics that are non-recurring.

Other filters and/or filter combinations can be used to help distinguish between stationary and variable clutter affecting multipath signals. For example, it is desirable to reject multipath fingers associated with variable clutter, since over a period of a few minutes such fingers would not likely recur. Further filtering can be used to remove recurring (at least during the sample period), and possibly strong but narrow “pencils” of RF energy. A narrow pencil image component could be represented by a near perfect reflective surface, such as a nearby metal panel truck stopped at a traffic light.

On the other hand, stationary clutter objects, such as concrete and glass building surfaces, adsorb some radiation before continuing with a reflected ray at some delay. Such stationary clutter-affected CDMA fingers are more likely to pass a 4×4 neighbor Median filter as well as a 40 to 50 percent Input Crop filter, and are thus more suited to neural net pattern recognition. FIG. 33 illustrates five “pencils” of CDMA finger energy that passed a simple 50 percent Input Crop filter. However, as shown in FIG. 34 when subjected to a 4×4 neighbor Median filter and 40 percent clipping, all five pencil-shaped fingers have been deleted. FIG. 35 illustrates the further simplified result of a 50 percent cropping and 4×4 neighbor median filtering. Other filtering methods include custom linear filtering, adaptive (Weiner) filtering, and custom nonlinear filtering.

The DSP 17 may provide data ensemble results, such as extracting the shortest time delay with a detectable relative signal strength, to the router/distributor 23, or alternatively results may be processed via one or more image filters 19, with subsequent transmission to the router/distributor 23. The outer/distributor 23 examines the processed message data from the DSP 17 and stores routing and distribution information in the message header. The router/distributor 23 then forwards the data messages to the output queue 21, for subsequent queuing then transmission to the appropriate location estimators DA module 10, TOA/TDOA module 8 or the HBS module 6, in FIG. 1.

Home Base Station Module

Upon receiving a message from the Data Capture Gateway or the signal processing subsystem 20, the HBS location estimate model examines a Home Base Station Table which defines relationships among a wireless MIN, and wireline telephone number, characteristics of the HBSD, and the possibility to use various signal types in order to further define the location within the address area of the fixed location HBSD. The following table, populated by the commercial mobile radio service provider at HBSD installation time, is used by the HBS model to determine location whenever the mobile station 140 is located within communication range of the HBSD:

TABLE HBS-1 HBSD Characteristics HBSD location CDMA Wireline Wireless Latitude, Strength/Delay MIN MIN HBSD Model Longitude Fixed HBSD Location Measurements? 3035561234 3035661299 Sony Qx-9000, 52.619488 N, 727 Magnolia Drive, No Rev. 1.1 112.4197601 W Boulder, CO 3035561236 3035661200 Panasonic PF-130, 52.645488 N, 1401 Digit Drive, Yes Rev. 5.0 112.4197601 W Boulder, CO 3035561236 3035661240 Panasonic PF-130, 52.779488 N, 1698 Folsom St., No Rev. 3.4 112.4197601 W Boulder, CO. 3035561284 3035661205 Panasonic PF-180, 51.619488 N, 990 Nutcracker Dr., NO Rev. 5.0 111.9197601 W Niwot, CO. 3035561224 3035661266 Panasonic PF-5000, 52.619558 N, 5606 Bismark Circle, Yes Rev. 1.0 112.4197601 W Denver, CO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

In the event RF signals are available for telemetry from the HBSD to the location system, such information may be solicited from the location system to the HBSD, in the form of a request/response message scheme, using for example, a data-under-voice technique. In such cases the SSP provides a data connection with the location system 142 via the PSTN. The home base station may interact with the mobile station in the same manner as a cordless telephone transceiver interacts with a cordless telephone, when the mobile station is within an acceptable range.

The HBS module 6 in FIG. 1 outputs the Latitude and Longitude location estimates to either the PSTN 124 or to the Internet 468, depending upon the source of the originating location request.

Distributed Antenna Module

Upon receipt of one or more data ensemble messages from the signal processing subsystem 20 in FIG. 1, the distributed antenna (DA) module 10 queries a previously populated distributed antenna database to determine the locations of distributed antennas associated with the measured DA antenna “pilot delays” so that the detected signal measurement delay signal values received from the mobile station receivers and base station receivers can be input to the TOA/TDOA module. The TOA/TDOA module then utilizes the radius-radius method, or time difference method, in order to provide location estimates within the building or area containing the distributed antennas.

Daisey Chaining Base Stations

As a practical matter it may be necessary in some network conditions to add base stations in areas to permit improved estimates to be achieved in wireless location. An aspect of the present disclosure includes daisy chaining communication circuits or transport facilities between or among base stations, in order to simplify the installation and operation of such base stations. Base stations normally communicate with the mobile switch center using T-carrier transport facilities, in order to carry voice and data bearer traffic, and to transport bi-directional control signals. However for various economic or other reasons it may not be justifiable to install such transport facilities. At the base station, by essentially originating a plurality of mobile telephone calls using the data communications option, and terminating such calls at the mobile switch center appropriately, the outputs of the base station transport multiplex circuits are re-directed into the data communication circuits normally intended for use by mobile stations in establishing a data circuit communication call to the network. Circuits at the mobile switch center used to terminate these data calls, redirect the communication to those circuits normally used to terminate the T-carrier facilities from the base stations. In this manner, existing wireless channels can be used to provide transport via this daisy-chaining method between certain base stations and the mobile switch center, thus simplifying connectivity in cases where the installation of transport facilities would either be impossible or impractical.

Distance First Order Module (TOA/TDOA)

Particular distinctions over the current state of the art include utilizing essentially the native electronics, antennas and standards, and opposed to overlay solutions, supervisor functions which control a hybrid set of techniques, including Time Of Arrival (TOA), Time Difference of Arrival (TDOA) in both the forward and reverse paths, pilot signal strengths, power control, mobile stations (mobile station) state conditions, stochastic features of environmental clutter, multipath detection and mitigation, and robustness, supporting a variety of conditions including degraded/faulty equipment, distributed and SMART antennas, various registration modes, and various call processing conditions such as soft, hard and idle hand-off conditions, location during the idle state, traffic-bearing states, and location during cases of severe multipath, such as that experienced in urban canyon environments, as well as location in suburban and rural cases.

Since each base station is required to emit a constant signal-strength pilot pseudo-noise (PN) sequence on the forward link channel identified uniquely in a network system by a pilot sequence offset and frequency assignment, it is possible to use the pilot channels of active, candidate, neighboring and remaining sets of pilots, associated with neighboring base stations, stored in the mobile station, for TOA and TDOA measurements performed by the mobile station.

Based on the arrival time measurement estimates and the speed of propagation, ranges or range differences between the base stations and the mobile station can be calculated. TOA and/or TDOA measurements can then be input to either the radius-radius multilateration or the time difference multilateration algorithms.

By utilizing the known base station positions, location of the mobile station can be determined. Since measurements and base station positions can be sent either to the network or the mobile station, location can be determined in either entity.

Since not all measurements can provide accurate location results at all times and conditions, a variety of supervisory logic processes can be invoked to resolve or litigate the problem area.

As those familiar with the EIA/TIA IS-95 and T1P1/JTC CDMA standards specifications know, mobile station call processing consists of four states:

-   1. Initialization State—where the mobile station selects and     acquires a system, a network, and timing information. This state     consists of four substates: System Determination, Pilot Channel     Acquisition, Sync Channel Acquisition, and Timing Change Substate; -   2. Idle State—where the mobile station monitors messages on the     Paging Channel, and supports procedures such as Message     Acknowledgment, nine modes of Registration, Idle Hand-off, Pilot     Search, and response to Overhead Information, such as System and     Access Parameters (which include BS Latitude and Longitude), mobile     station Message Transmission Operation (i.e., Data Burst) and     Neighboring List messages; -   3. System Access State—where the mobile station sends messages to     the base station on the Access Channel. This state consists of six     substates: Update Overhead, Origination Attempt, Page Response,     mobile station Order/Message Response, Registration Access; Message     Transmission Operation/Data Burst); -   4. Mobile station Control on the Traffic Channel State—where the     mobile station communicates with the primary base station using the     forward and Reverse Traffic Channels. This state consists of five     substates: TC initialization, Waiting for Order, Waiting for mobile     station Answer, Conversation (which includes hand-off procedures and     earliest arriving usable multipath components of pilots), and     Release.

At power-up an IS-95 or T1P1 PCS CDMA compliant mobile station enters Initialization State, as described in IS-95, section 6.6.1. During the System Determination substate, the mobile station refers to its internal memory to acquire preferences for system carrier (A or B), or the preferred carrier at 1.8-2.0 GHz, and for other types of service, including advanced mobile phone service, or AMPS, as well as narrow band advanced mobile phone service, or NAMPS.

A CDMA-preferred mobile station then transfers to the Pilot Acquisition Substate. The mobile station tunes to the CDMA Channel number equal to CDMACH_(s) then sets its Walsh code (always W0) for the Pilot channel where it begins searching for pilot energy, in terms of energy per bit, per spectral density.

Once a sufficiently strong (as defined by the T_ADD threshold parameter) pilot channel has been identified within T_(20m) seconds, the mobile station enters the Sync Channel Acquisition Substate, where the mobile station receives a Sync channel Message that includes, among other information, system time and the unique PN offset index for that particular BS. In the Timing Change substate, the mobile station adjusts its internal timing to match the BS's CDMA system time. At the completion of the Timing Change substate, the mobile station is completely synchronized to the CDMA system's BS time.

After satisfactory synchronization the mobile station then enters the stable Idle State, where the paging channel begins to be monitored.

At this point at least two alternatives are possible:

-   1. Perform Location determination without consumption of     user-perceived air time via the introduction of a new call     processing state, or -   2. Perform Location determination via the traffic channel (requires     air time)

In cases where Distributed Antennas (DAs), and/or Home Base Stations (HBS) are used, each location of these devices can be sent to the mobile station. There are at least three format-types possible in conveying this type of location information in the GeoLocation Message. First, a unique identifier can be assigned to each DA/HBS, such as a fully distinguished name. An example of location information could be: Within the USA, State of Colorado, city of Denver, with Service Provider xyz, BS ID 129, Distributed Antenna number 8. Or more compactly, the location string is structured as, “USA.CO.DEN.xyz.129.DA8”. Secondly, an easy-to-understand human style data message can be sent, such as, “You are near the 30th floor of the Sears Tower building”. Third, data values for Latitude, Longitude, and possibly altitude and accuracy could be sent from the BS or Location Center to the mobile station/LU. In order to be most easily useful to an end-user, in the first and third cases, a database would be needed within the mobile station or a Personal Digital Assistant device, which performs a translation of numerical data into a form useful for human understanding.

The mobile station thus maintains a list of location pilot offsets, where the list is ranked based on a weighted combination of received signal energy and BS location. The mobile station selects the best candidate BSs for location estimate purposes, which may be slightly different from the Active, candidate and remaining lists.

Additionally the mobile station may send a Data_Burst message back to the BS or Location Center, informing that no other Pilot Channels were detected. This “negative” Venn diagram information may be useful with various heuristics for location estimate deduction, for example, to note where the mobile station is not located.

It is the difference of system time values (as opposed to their absolute values) that is important. Note that for purposes of location, any communication back to a BS 122 would require re-synchronizing onto that BS's system time. Although not specified in either IS-95 or T1P1/JTC's PCS CDMA standards, most mobile station manufacturers build correlators with resolutions of approximately ⅛ PN chip, which is about 125 nanoseconds (nS). A location equipped mobile station will provide +/−125 nS. accuracy, which is about +/−125 feet.

The mobile station or location entity can process the arrival time estimates in at least two ways. first the mobile station may difference the measurements (preferred) to form time-difference-of-arrivals (TDOA); or second, the mobile station may determine absolute time-of-arrival (TOA) by solving for the clock bias between the mobile station and other CDMA system time reports. TOA requires very well calibrated BS system clocks among each other.

The following procedure illustrates significant capabilities hidden in the CDMA standards, which provide a substantial enabling base with which to provide the measurements and data for location methods disclosed herein.

First the BS sends the Neighbor List Update Message, containing a complete list of the neighboring pilot PN sequence offset indices (i.e., via the NGHBR_PN field) associated with candidate BSs in the area, with which the mobile station could possibly scan for detecting usable earliest arriving neighboring useable BS multipath components. This list should typically be a complete list, as opposed to the presumed candidate subset. If the mobile station is not already in the Traffic/Conversation State, it could invoke this state by calling a dialable telephone number in the network, e.g., a designed “Quiet Line” This approach also allows a billing record to be generated according to routine wireless telephony practice. If the network is to determine location, then the network pages the mobile station 140, connecting the mobile station to a Quiet Line/Voice message upon mobile station answer. Note that it may be desirable to suppress the mobile station ringer sounding for certain location applications. Other methods may also be possible.

During installation, each BS 122 in a particular area is provisioned with the locations of all possible neighboring BSs in its area. The BSs 122 use this information to populate a list of all Latitudes and Longitudes which can be sent to the LUs, using the Neighbor List Update message. Second, assuming that the mobile station does not currently have this data or if unknown, then the BS shall send a series of Mobile Station Registered Messages, each message containing the latitude and Longitude values (i.e., the BASE_LAT and BASE_LONG fields) associated with a neighboring BS pilot PN offset sent with the first message. Note that the constants N_(6m), Supported Traffic Channel Candidate Active Set size, normally set to 6, and N_(7m), Supported Traffic Channel Candidate Set size, normally set to 5, and N_(8m), the Minimum Supported Neighbor Set size, normally set to 20, should be sufficient for most location purposes, however these constants could be changed if the need arises.

Third, the BS saves the current T_ADD and T_DROP values in the BS memory, associated with the In-Traffic LU, and sends the In-Traffic System Parameters Message, which includes reduced T_ADD and T_DROP parameter values, useable for location purposes. The value for T_ADD would typically be set to a value near the lower end of the IS-98 specification, possibly below the 80 dB dynamic range requirement, close to (but not including) the thermal noise power level of the LU receiver. Note that if the LU is using restricted battery, e.g., a portable, then the time for keeping T_ADD and T_DROP at a low value for location estimates purposes, should be kept short to delay adverse consequences, such as increased current drain and noise.

Reduced T_ADD and T_DROP values sent to the mobile station will cause the LU to scan all conceivable neighboring BS pilots provided to it by the BS, and to measure the strengths of each received pilot, and to determine the pilot arrival time for each pilot offset. Note that the signal strengths now measured may not be sufficient for carrying traffic, but may be sufficient for location purposes.

Assuming the network is to determine location, then the mobile station reports the arrival time, PILOT_ARRIVAL, for each pilot reported to the base station. According to the standard the arrival time is measured relative to the mobile station's time reference (which was previously determined from the active BS), in units of PN chips (1/2288) microseconds, or about 814 nanoseconds, as follows: PILOT_(—) PN−PHASE=(PILOT_ARRIVAL+(64×PILOT_(—) PN))mod 2¹⁵,

where PILOT_PN is the PN sequence offset index of the pilot associated with the BS pilot indices in the neighbor list.

In order to achieve location accuracy estimates on the order of a few hundred feet (or nanoseconds) a higher resolution than 1 PN chip is required. Although not specified directly in IS-95, most mobile manufacturers use correlators with resolutions of approximately ⅛ PN chip, or about 102 nS (suggesting that if no other systemic errors are present, about 102 feet of error is expected). Note that the search window size SRCH_WIN_A_(r) for each pilot may need to be increased if there are substantial delays experienced from the environment. It is desirable for the mobile station to report the second and third arrival time (or the second and third fingers), and their relative signal strengths, corresponding to each detectable Pilot Channel.

If more than one PILOT_ARRIVAL is available then a basic TDOA multilateration algorithm may be invoked, at either the LU, or the network. In the network case, the active BS 122 must send a Pilot Request Order for Pilot Measurement Request Order (ORDER code 010001), which causes the mobile station 140 to forward its measurements to the BS (and consequently the network, as appropriate).

At this point a minimally sufficient number of measurements are available to perform a location estimate. Thus the BS should restore the original T_ADD and T_DROP values (previously saved in the BS memory) to the mobile station, via the In-Traffic System Parameters Message.

Additional information may be desirable, such as the active BS' TOA measurement, as well as associated BS measurements of the mobile station's TOA to their BS location. This added information may be sent to the mobile station if the mobile station is to perform location, via the Data Burst Message on the Forward Traffic Channel. Since 26 combinations of data burst types have been reserved for future use in the standard, dedication of several combinations could be used to telemeter location-related data. In cases where duplicate ranging or other information is available, various supervisor techniques mentioned elsewhere in this document, could be used to refine the location estimate.

Once the location estimate has been performed, any number of means could be used to provide the results to the end user.

The IS-95 and J-STD-008 CDMA specifications require that BSs should be synchronized to within +/−3 microseconds of CDMA system time and shall be synchronized to within +/−10 microseconds. The method of the present disclosure assumes the cost of GPS receivers is relatively small, thus time calibration at a more precise calibration level at each location BS is recommended to be used by using the very accurate GPS time parameters. Preferably the absolute error deviation among surrounding or neighboring base stations should be less than 800 nanoseconds, however in most cases this should not be a fixed requirement, but rather a preference. In cases where absolute BS timing is prohibitively expensive, then the “Forced Hand-off” method discussed below can be used to overcome the preferred, or strict absolute BS timing requirements.

Three methods have been currently identified. Some of these techniques apply to other air interface types as well.

-   -   1. Use the first finger at BS (Absolute Ranging), and if         detectable, invoke a “Forced Hand-off” between the mobile         station and a neighboring BS, for a time sufficient to complete         signal measurements between a mobile station transmitter and a         BS receiver, and if possible, between a BS transmitter and a         mobile station receiver, which gives access to as many BS's as         can be detected either by the mobile station receiver or the         surrounding BS receivers.     -   2. Use the first finger at mobile station (Differential Ranging)         to obtain differential time readings of pilot channel from         mobile station     -   3. Use the Pilot Power Level Measurements and Ground Clutter         (Stochastic information)

Now in the general case where three or more BSs can either determine TDOA and/or the mobile station can telemeter such data to the location entity within the network, repeat this method for BS₂ and BS₃, and BS₃ and BS₁, in order to determine the remaining curves, thus yielding location within a 2D space. In the case of 3D geometry (such as a multi-story building with multi-floor pico BS cells), the process must be repeated a fourth time in order to determine altitude.

MATLAB MathWorks code to implement the above algorithms follows:

clear;hold off; j = sqrt(−1); step_size = 0.03; # Set up BS variables  theta = pi/3*ones(3,1);  D = 10*ones(3,1);  z(1) = 0;  z(2) = D(1);  z(3) = D(3)*exp(−j*theta(1)); # Define the distance parameters  d = [0 6.4 −6.8]′;  location1 = [ ];  location2 = [ ];  location3 = [ ]; # Iterate and solve for the location with respect to the first BS (at (0,0) )  t2 = −pi:0.05:0.05;  for t1 = −pi/3:0.05:0.05,   t1 = t1+0.001;   r1 = 1./(exp(j*t1)−exp(j*t2)).*(D(1)−d(1)*exp(j*t2));   r2 = 1./(exp(j*t1)−exp(j*t2)).*(D(1)−d(1)*exp(j*t1));   temp = arg(r1);   index = find(abs(temp) == min(abs(temp)));   location1 = [location1;r1(index)*exp(j*t1)];  end;  for t1 = −pi/3:0.05:0.05   t1 = t1+0.001;   r1 = 1./(exp(j*t1)−exp(j*t2)).*(D(2)−d(2)*exp(j*t2));   r2 = 1./(exp(j*t1)−exp(j*t2)).*(D(2)−d(2)*exp(j*t1));   temp = arg(r1);   index = find(abs(temp) == min(abs(temp)));   location2 = [location2;r1(index)*exp(j*t1)];  end;  for t1 = −pi/3:0.05:0.05   t1 = t1+0.001;   r1 = 1./(exp(j*t1)−exp(j*t2)).*(D(1)−d(3)*exp(j*t2));   r2 = 1./(exp(j*t1)−exp(j*t2)).*(D(1)−d(3)*exp(j*t1));   temp = arg(r1);   index = find(abs(temp) == min(abs(temp)));   location3 = [location3;r1(index)*exp(j*t1)];  end;  location2 = location2*exp(j*arg(z(3)−z(2))) + z(2);  location3 = location3*exp(j*arg(z(1)−z(3))) + z(3);  set yrange [−10:1];  set xrange [−1:11];  plot([z;z(1)])  hold on  plot(location1)  plot(location2)  plot(location3) Wireless Location Data Collection

It is worthwhile to discuss techniques for both obtaining the initial collection of verified location data, as well as how additional location data can be obtained for updating the data in this data base in a straightforward cost-effective manner.

Regarding both the obtaining of the initial collection of verified location data as well as gathering data updates, it is believed that some of this data can be obtained from the initial and continued engineering of the base station infrastructure by the wireless telephony service provider(s) in the radio coverage area. Additional verified location data can be obtained by trained technicians driving and/or walking certain areas and periodically, at each of a plurality of locations: (a) determining a location estimate (using, for example, GPS if possible and/or offsets from GPS readings); and (b) using an mobile station 140 at the location to generate location data communication with the wireless base station infrastructure.

Alternatively, it is a novel aspect of the present disclosure that a straightforward method and system for gathering verified location data has been discovered, wherein a conventional mobile station 140 can be used without any additional electronics or circuit modifications. One embodiment of this method and system utilizes the personnel of businesses that travel predetermined routes through the radio coverage area (e.g., a delivery and/or pickup service) to generate such data using a conventional mobile station 140 while traversing their routes through the radio coverage area. One example of such personnel is the postal workers, and in particular, the mail carriers having predetermined (likely repetitive) routes for mail pickup and/or delivery at predetermined sites (denoted hereinafter as “mail pickup/delivery sites” or simply “mail sites”). By having such mail carriers each carry a conventional mobile station 140 and periodically generate location data communication with the wireless base station infrastructure at mail sites along their routes, additional verified location data can be added to a Location Data Base (not shown) cost effectively.

To describe how this can be performed, a brief description of further features available in a typical mobile station 140 is needed. At least some modules of mobile station 140 have the following capabilities:

-   -   (27.2.1) a unique mobile station 140 identification number; in         fact, every mobile station 140 must have such a number (its         telephone number);     -   (27.2.2) the mobile station 140 has a display and a display         memory for presenting stored data records having telephone         numbers and related data to a user. Further, some portion of         each data record is annotation and some portion is able to be         transmitted to the wireless base station network. In particular,         the mobile station 140 is able to store and recall data records         of sufficient size such that each data record may include the         following information for a corresponding mail pickup/delivery         site along a mail route: (a) an address or other textual         description data (e.g., an English-like description) of the mail         pickup/delivery site; (b) a predetermined telephone number;         and (c) a numerical code (denoted the “site code” hereinafter)         associated with the mail pickup/delivery site, wherein the site         code is at least unique within a set of site codes corresponding         to the mail sites on the mail route. In one embodiment, the         memory may store 99 or more such data records, and the display         is scrollable through the data records;     -   (27.2.3) the mobile station 140 can have its display memory         updated from either an RS232 port residing on the mobile         station, or from an over-the-air activation capability of the         wireless network;     -   (27.2.4) the mobile station 140 has a pause feature, wherein a         telephone number can be dialed, and after some predetermined         number of seconds, additional predetermined data can be         transmitted either through additional explicit user request         (e.g., a “hard pause”), or automatically (e.g., a “soft pause”).         Moreover, the additional predetermined data can reside in the         display memory.

Assuming these features, the following steps can be performed for acquiring additional verified location data:

-   -   (27.3.1) For (at least some of the) postal carriers having         predetermined routes of addresses or locations visited, the         postal carriers are each provided with an mobile station 140         having the capabilities described in (27.2.1) through (27.2.4)         above, wherein the memory in each provided mobile station has a         corresponding list of data records for the addresses visited on         the route of the postal carrier having the mobile station.         Moreover, each such list has the data records in the same         sequence as the postal carrier visits the corresponding mail         sites, and each data record includes the information as in         (27.2.2) for a corresponding mail site the postal carrier visits         on his/her mail route. More precisely, each of the data records         has: (a) a description of the address or location of its         corresponding mail pickup/delivery site, (b) a telephone number         for dialing a data collection system for the location center 142         (or, alternatively, a reference to a memory area in the mobile         station having this telephone number since it is likely to be         the same number for most data records), and (c) a site code for         the mail pickup/delivery site that is to be transmitted after a         predetermined soft pause time-out. Note that the corresponding         list of data records for a particular postal route may be         downloaded from, for example, a computer at a post office (via         the RS232 port of the mobile station 140), or alternatively, the         list may be provided to the mobile station 140 by an         over-the-air activation. Further, there are various embodiments         of over-the-air activation that may be utilized by an embodiment         of the present disclosure. In one embodiment, the postal carrier         dials a particular telephone number associated with data         collection system and identifies both him/herself by his/her         personal identification number (PIN), and the postal route (via         a route identifying code). Subsequently, the mail pickup and         delivery sites along the identified route are downloaded into         the memory of the mobile station 140 via wireless signals to the         mobile station 140. However, additional over-the-air techniques         are also within the scope of the present disclosure such as:     -   (a) If the postal carrier's route is already associated with the         carrier's PIN for over-the-air activation, then the carrier may         only need to enter his/her PIN.     -   (b) If the mobile station 140 is already associated with a         particular route, then the carrier may only need to activate the         mobile station 140, or alternatively, enter his/her PIN for         obtaining an over-the-air download of the route.     -   (c) Regardless of how the initial download of mail sites is         provided to the mobile station 140, it is also an aspect of the         present disclosure that if there are more mail sites on a route         than there is sufficient memory to store corresponding data         records in the mobile station, then the data records may be         downloaded in successive segments. For example, if there are 150         mail sites on a particular route and storage for only 99 data         records in the mobile station, then in one embodiment, a first         segment of 98 data records for the first 98 mail pickup/delivery         sites on the route are downloaded together with a 99^(th) data         record for transmitting an encoding requesting a download of the         next 52 data records for the remaining mail sites.         (Alternatively, the data collection system may monitor mobile         station 140 requests and automatically detect the last location         capture request of a downloaded segment, and subsequently         automatically download the next segment of mail site data         records). Accordingly, when the data records of the first         segment have been utilized, a second segment may be downloaded         into the mobile station 140. Moreover, at the end of the last         segment, the data collection system may cause the first segment         for the route to be automatically downloaded into the mobile         station 140 in preparation for the next traversal of the route.     -   (27.3.2) Given that a download into the mobile station 140 of         (at least a portion of) the data for a postal route has         occurred, the postal carrier traversing the route then         iteratively scrolls to the next data record on the list stored         in the mobile station as he/she visits each corresponding mail         pickup/delivery site, and activates the corresponding data         record. That is, the following steps are performed at each mail         pickup/delivery site:         -   (a) As the postal carrier arrives at each mail             pickup/delivery site, he or she checks the scrollable mobile             station 140 display to assure that the address or location             of the mail pickup/delivery site is described by the data             record in the portion of the mobile station display for             activating associated data record instructions.         -   (b) The postal carrier then merely presses a button             (typically a “send” button) on the mobile station 140 for             concurrently dialing the telephone number of the data             collection system, and initiating the timer for the soft             pause (in the mobile station 140) associated with the site             code for the mail pickup/delivery site currently being             visited.     -   (c) Given that the soft pause is of sufficient length to allow         for the data collection system call to be setup, the mobile         station 140 then transmits the site code for the present mail         pickup/delivery site.     -   (d) Upon receiving the telephone number of the mobile station         140 (via automatic number identification (AIN)), and the site         code, the data collection system then performs the following         steps:         -   (d1) A retrieval of an identifier identifying the route             (route id). Note this may be accomplished by using the             telephone number of the mobile station. That is, when the             data collection system first detects that the mobile station             140 is to be used on a particular route, the telephone             number of the mobile station and the route id may be             associated in a data base so that the route id can be             retrieved using the telephone number of the mobile station.         -   (d2) A retrieval of a location representation (e.g.,             latitude, longitude, and possibly height) of the mail             pickup/delivery site identified by the combination of the             route id and the site code is performed by accessing a data             base having, for each mail site, the following associated             data items: the route id for the mail site, the site code,             the mail site address (or location description), and the             mail site location representation (e.g., latitude,             longitude, possibly height).         -   (d3) A request to the location center 142 is issued             indicating that the location data for the mobile station 140             (resulting from, e.g., the call being maintained between the             mobile station and the data collection system) is to be             retrieved from the wireless network, temporarily saved, and             a location estimate for the mobile station is to be             performed. Accordingly, the data collection system request             to the location center 142 the following:             -   (i) the telephone number of the mobile station 140;             -   (ii) the retrieved location of the mobile station 140                 according to the route id and site code;             -   (iii) a request for the location center 142 to perform a                 location estimate on the mobile station 140 and return                 the location estimate to the data collection system;             -   (iv) a request that the location center 142 retain the                 location for the mobile station 140 and associate with                 it the location of the mobile station 140 received from                 the data collection system.

Regarding step (iii), the location estimate may also include the steps temporarily increasing the mobile station transmitter power level

-   -   (27.3.3) Subsequently, given that the location center 142         performs as requested, when the data collection system receives         the mobile station 140 location estimate from the location         center, the data collection system first associates the returned         mobile station location estimate with the corresponding data         collection system information regarding the mobile station, and         secondly, performs “reasonability” tests on the information         received from the mobile station 140 for detecting, filtering         and/or alerting systems and personnel whenever the postal         carrier appears to be transmitting (via the mobile station 140)         from a location different from what the route id and site code         indicate. The following are examples of such reasonability         tests:         -   (a) If a threshold number of postal carrier transmittals             disagree with the location center 142 estimate by a             predetermined distance (likely dependent upon area type),             then tag these particular transmittals as problematic and             mark all transmittals from the mobile station 140 as suspect             for “distance” inaccuracies.         -   (b) If there is less than a threshold amount of time between             certain postal carrier transmittals, then tag these             particular transmittals as problematic and mark all             transmittals from the mobile station 140 as suspect for             “time” inaccuracies.         -   (c) If an expected statistical deviation between a sampling             of the postal carrier transmittals and the location             estimates from the location center 142 vary by more than a             threshold amount, then tag these particular transmittals as             problematic and mark all transmittals from the mobile             station 140 as suspect for “statistical” inaccuracies.         -   (d) If an expected statistical deviation between a sampling             of the times of the postal carrier transmittals and an             expected timing between these transmittals vary by more than             a threshold amount, then tag these particular transmittals             as problematic and mark all transmittals from the mobile             station 140 as suspect for “statistical” inaccuracies.     -   (27.3.4) When suspect or problematic mobile station location         information is detected (e.g., incorrect site code) in step         (27.3.3), the data collection system may perform any of the         following actions:         -   (a) Alert the postal carrier of problematic and/or suspected             inaccuracies in real time, after a certain number of             transmittals or at a later time. Note that such alerts as             well as positive feedback at the end of the postal carriers             route (or segments thereof) may be advantageous in that it             likely inhibits the postal carrier from experimenting with             transmittals from locations that are purposefully             inaccurate, but at the same time provides sufficiently             timely feedback to encourage a conscientious postal carrier.         -   (b) Alert the Postal Service of perceived discrepancies in             the mobile station 140 transmittals by the postal carrier.         -   (c) Dispatch location center technicians to the area to             transmit duplicate signals.     -   (27.3.5) If the transmittal(s) from the mobile station 140 are         not suspect, then the data collection system communicates with         the location center 142 for requesting that each location         received from the mobile station 140 be stored with its         corresponding retrieved location (obtained in step (d2)) as a         verified location value in the Location Data Base (not shown).         Alternatively, if the transmittals from the mobile station 140         are suspect, then the data collection system may communicate         with the location center 142 for requesting that at least some         of the location data from the mobile station 140 be discarded.

Note that a similar or identical procedure to the steps immediately above may be applied with other services/workers such as courier services, delivery services, meter readers, street sweepers, and bus drivers having predetermined routes.

Additional Modules to Increase Location Hypothesis Accuracy

The following modules may be provided in various embodiments of the present disclosure, and in particular, as part of the location engine 139. Further modules and description directed to the location center 142 and its functionality, the location engine 139, various location enhancing techniques, and various additional embodiments are provided in U.S. Provisional Patent Application having Ser. No. 60/044,821, filed Apr. 25, 1997, by Dupray, Karr, and LeBlanc from which the present application claims priority, and which is fully incorporated herein by reference.

Path Comparison Module

The Path Comparison Module implements the following strategy: the confidence of a particular location hypothesis is be increased (decreased) if it is (not) predicting a path That lies along a known transportation pathway (and the speed of the target MS is sufficiently high). For instance, if a time series of target MS location hypotheses for a given FOM is predicting a path of the target MS that lies along an interstate highway, the confidence of the currently active location hypothesis for this FOM should, in general, be increased. Thus, at a high level the following steps may be performed:

-   -   (a) For each FOM having a currently active location hypothesis         in a Run-time Location Hypothesis Storage Area, determine a         recent “path” obtained from a time series of location hypotheses         for the FOM. This computation for the “path” is performed by         stringing together successive “center of area” (COA) or centroid         values determined from the most pertinent target MS location         estimate in each location hypothesis (recall that each location         hypothesis may have a plurality of target MS area estimates with         one being the most pertinent). The information is stored in, for         example, a matrix of values wherein one dimension of the matrix         identifies the FOM and the a second dimension of the matrix         represents a series of COA path values. Of course, some entries         in the matrix may be undefined.     -   (b) Compare each path obtained in (a) against known         transportation pathways in an area containing the path. A value,         path_match(i), representing to what extent the path matches any         known transportation pathway is computed. Such values are used         later in a computation for adjusting the confidence of each         corresponding currently active location hypothesis.         Velocity/Acceleration Calculation Module

The Velocity/Acceleration Calculation Module computes velocity and/or acceleration estimates for the target MS using currently active location hypotheses and previous location hypothesis estimates of the target MS. In one embodiment, for each FOM having a currently active location hypothesis (with positive confidences) and a sufficient number of previous (reasonably recent) target MS location hypotheses, a velocity and/or acceleration may be calculated. In an alternative embodiment, such a velocity and/or acceleration may be calculated using the currently active location hypotheses and one or more recent “most likely” locations of the target MS output by the Location Center. If the estimated velocity and/or acceleration corresponding to a currently active location hypothesis is reasonable for the region, then its confidence value is incremented; if not, then its confidence is decremented. The algorithm may be summarized as follows:

-   -   (a) Approximate speed and/or acceleration estimates for         currently active target MS location hypotheses may be provided         using path information related to the currently active location         hypotheses and previous target MS location estimates in a manner         similar to the description of the Path Comparison Module.         Accordingly, a single confidence adjustment number may be         determined for each currently active location hypothesis for         indicating the extent to which its corresponding velocity and/or         acceleration calculations are reasonable for its particular         target MS location estimate. This calculation is performed by         retrieving information from an Area Characteristics Data Base.         Since each location hypothesis includes timestamp data         indicating when the MS location signals were received from the         target MS, the velocity and/or acceleration associated with a         path for a currently active location hypothesis can be         straightforwardly approximated. Accordingly, a confidence         adjustment value, vel_ok(i), indicating a likelihood that the         velocity calculated for the i^(th) currently active location         hypothesis (having adequate corresponding path information) may         be appropriate for the environmental characteristics of the         location hypothesis target MS location estimate. Thus, if the         target MS location estimate includes a portion of an interstate         highway, then an appropriate velocity might correspond to a         speed of up to 100 miles per hour, whereas if the target MS         location estimate includes only rural dirt roads and tomato         patches, then a likely speed might be no more than 30 miles per         hour with an maximum speed of 60 miles per hour (assuming         favorable environmental characteristics such as weather). Note         that a list of such environmental characteristics may include         such factors as: area type, time of day, season. Further note         that more unpredictable environmental characteristics such as         traffic flow patterns, weather (e.g., clear, raining, snowing,         etc.) may also be included, values for these latter         characteristics coming from an Environmental Data Base which         receives and maintains information on such unpredictable         characteristics. Also note that a similar confidence adjustment         value, acc_ok(i), may be provided for currently active location         hypotheses, wherein the confidence adjustment is related to the         appropriateness of the acceleration estimate of the target MS.         Attribute Comparison Module

The Attribute Comparison Module compares attribute values for location hypotheses generated from different FOMs, and determines if the confidence of certain of the currency active location hypotheses should be increased due to a similarity in related values for the attribute. That is, for an attribute A, an attribute value for A derived from a set S_(FOM[1]) of one or more location hypotheses generated by one FOM, FOM[1], is compared with another attribute value for A derived from a set S_(FOM2) of one or more location hypotheses generated by a different FOM, FOM[2] for determining if these attribute values cluster (i.e., are sufficiently close to one another) so that a currently active location hypothesis in S_(FOM[1]) and a currently active location hypothesis in S_(FOM2) should have their confidences increased. For example, the attribute may be a “target MS path data” attribute, wherein a value for the attribute is an estimated target MS path derived from location hypotheses generated by a fixed FOM over some (recent) time period. Alternatively, the attribute might be, for example, one of a velocity and/or acceleration, wherein a value for the attribute is a velocity and/or acceleration derived from location hypotheses generated by a fixed FOM over some (recent) time period.

In a general context, the Attribute Comparison Module operates according to the following premise:

(37.1) for each of two or more currently active location hypotheses (with positive confidences) if:

-   -   (a) each of these currently active location hypotheses, H, was         initially generated by a corresponding different FOM_(H);     -   (b) for a given MS estimate attribute and each such currently         active location hypothesis, H, there is a corresponding value         for the attribute (e.g., the attribute value might be an MS path         estimate, or alternatively an MS estimated velocity, or an MS         estimated acceleration) wherein the attribute value is derived         without using a FOM different from FOM_(H), and;     -   (c) the derived attribute values cluster sufficiently well,     -   then each of these currently active location hypotheses, H, will         have their corresponding confidences increased. That is, these         confidences will be increased by a confidence adjustment value         or delta.

Note that the phrase “cluster sufficiently well” above may have a number of technical embodiments, including performing various cluster analysis techniques wherein any clusters (according to some statistic) must satisfy a system set threshold for the members of the cluster being close enough to one another. Further, upon determining the (any) location hypotheses satisfying (37.1), there are various techniques that may be used in determining a change or delta in confidences to be applied. For example, in one embodiment, an initial default confidence delta that may be utilized is: if “cf” denotes the confidence of such a currently active location hypothesis satisfying (37.1), then an increased confidence that still remains in the interval [0, 1.0] may be: cf+[(1−cf)/(1+cf)]², or, cf*[1.0+cf^(n))], n.=>2, or, cf*[a constant having a system tuned parameter as a factor]. That is, the confidence deltas for these examples are: [(1−cf)/(1+cf)]² (an additive delta), and, [1.0+cf^(n)] (a multiplicative delta), and a constant. Additionally, note that it is within the scope of the present disclosure to also provide such confidence deltas (additive deltas or multiplicative deltas) with factors related to the number of such location hypotheses in the cluster.

Moreover, note that it is an aspect of the present disclosure to provide an adaptive mechanism for automatically determining performance enhancing changes in confidence adjustment values such as the confidence deltas for the present module. That is, such changes are determined by applying an adaptive mechanism, such as a genetic algorithm, to a collection of “system parameters” (including parameters specifying confidence adjustment values as well as system parameters) in order to enhance performance of an embodiment of the present disclosure. More particularly, such an adaptive mechanism may repeatedly perform the following steps:

-   -   (a) modify such system parameters;     -   (b) consequently activate an instantiation of the Location         Center (having the modified system parameters) to process, as         input, a series of MS signal location data that has been         archived together with data corresponding to a verified MS         location from which signal location data was transmitted (e.g.,         such data as is stored in a Data Base); and     -   (c) then determine if the modifications to the system parameters         enhanced Location Center performance in comparison to previous         performances.

Assuming this module adjusts confidences of currently active location hypotheses according to one or more of the attributes: target MS path data, target MS velocity, and target MS acceleration, the computation for this module may be summarized in the following steps:

-   -   (a) Determine if any of the currently active location hypotheses         satisfy the premise (37.1) for the attribute. Note that in         making this determination, average distances and average         standard deviations for the paths (velocities and/or         accelerations) corresponding to currently active location         hypotheses may be computed.     -   (b) For each currently active location hypothesis (wherein “i”         uniquely identifies the location hypothesis) selected to have         its confidence increased, a confidence adjustment value,         path_similar(i) (alternatively, velocity_similar(i) and/or         acceleration_similar(i)), is computed indicating the extent to         which the attribute value matches another attribute value being         predicted by another FOM.

Note that such confidence adjustment values are used later in the calculation of an aggregate confidence adjustment to particular currently active location hypotheses.

Extrapolation Module

The Extrapolation Module works on the following premise: if for a currently active location hypothesis there is sufficient previous related information regarding estimates of the target MS (e.g., from the same FOM or from using a “most likely” previous target MS estimate output by the Location Center), then an extrapolation may be performed for predicting future target MS locations that can be compared with new location hypotheses. Note that interpolation routines (e.g., conventional algorithms such as Lagrange or Newton polynomials) may be used to determine an equation that approximates a target MS path corresponding to a currently active location hypothesis.

Subsequently, such an extrapolation equation may be used to compute a future target MS location. For further information regarding such interpolation schemes, the following reference is incorporated herein by reference: Mathews, 1992, Numerical methods for mathematics, science, and engineering. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall.

Accordingly, if a new currently active location hypothesis is received, then the target MS location estimate of the new location hypothesis may be compared with the predicted location. Consequently, a confidence adjustment value can be determined according to how well if the location hypothesis “i”. That is, this confidence adjustment value will be larger as the new MS estimate and the predicted estimate become closer together.

Note that in one embodiment of the present disclosure, such predictions are based solely on previous target MS location estimates output by Location Center. Thus, in such an embodiment, substantially every currently active location hypothesis can be provided with a confidence adjustment value by this module once a sufficient number of previous target MS location estimates have been output. Accordingly, a value, extrapolation_chk(i), that represents how accurately the new currently active location hypothesis (identified here by “i”) matches the predicted location is determined.

Analytical Reasoner Controller

Given one or more currently active location hypotheses for the same target MS input to a controller (denoted the Analytical Reasoner Controller herein), this controller activates, for each such input location hypothesis, the other submodules (denoted hereinafter as “adjustment submodules”) with this location hypothesis. Subsequently, the Analytical Reasoner Controller receives an output confidence adjustment value computed by each adjustment submodule for adjusting the confidence of this location hypothesis. Note that each adjustment submodule determines:

-   -   (a) whether the adjustment submodule may appropriately compute a         confidence adjustment value for the location hypothesis supplied         by the controller. (For example, in some cases there may not be         a sufficient number of location hypotheses in a time series from         a fixed FOM);     -   (b) if appropriate, then the adjustment submodule computes a         non-zero confidence adjustment value that is returned to the         Analytical Reasoner Controller.

Subsequently, the controller uses the output from the adjustment submodules to compute an aggregate confidence adjustment for the corresponding location hypothesis. In one particular embodiment of the present disclosure, values for the eight types of confidence adjustment values (described in sections above) are output to the present controller for computing an aggregate confidence adjustment value for adjusting the confidence of the currently active location hypothesis presently being analyzed. As an example of how such confidence adjustment values may be utilized, assuming a currently active location hypothesis is identified by “i”, the outputs from the above described adjustment submodules may be more fully described as:

path_match(i)1 if there are sufficient previous (and recent) location hypotheses for the same target MS as “i” that have been generated by the same FOM that generated “i”, and, the target MS location estimates provided by the location hypothesis “i” and the previous location hypotheses follow a known transportation pathway. 0 otherwise. vel_ok(i) 1 if the velocity calculated for the i^(th) currently active location hypothesis (assuming adequate corresponding path information) is typical for the area (and the current environmental characteristics) of this location hypothesis' target MS location estimate; 0.2 if the velocity calculated for the i^(th) currently active location hypothesis is near a maximum for the area (and the current environmental characteristics) of this location hypothesis' target MS location estimate; 0 if the velocity calculated is above the maximum. acc_ok(i) 1  if the acceleration calculated for the i^(th) currently active location hypothesis (assuming adequate corresponding path information) is typical for the area (and the current environmental characteristics) of this location hypothesis' target MS location estimate; 0.2  if the acceleration calculated for the i^(th) currently active location hypothesis is near a maximum for the area (and the current environmental characteristics) of this location hypothesis' target MS location estimate; 0    if the acceleration calculated is above the maximum.   similar_path(i)1 if the location hypothesis “i” satisfies (37.1) for the target MS path data attribute; 0 otherwise. velocity_similar(i) 1 if the location hypothesis “i” satisfies (37.1) for the target MS velocity attribute; 0 otherwise. acceleration_similar(i) 1  if the location hypothesis “i” satisfies (37.1) for the target MS acceleration attribute;  0   otherwise. extrapolation_chk(i) 1  if the location hypothesis “i” is “near” a previously predicted MS location for the target MS;  0   otherwise.

Additionally, for each of the above confidence adjustments, there is a corresponding Location Center system settable parameter whose value may be determined by repeated activation of an Adaptation Engine. Accordingly, for each of the confidence adjustment types, T, above, there is a corresponding system settable parameter, “alpha_T”, that is tunable by the Adaptation Engine. Accordingly, the following high level program segment illustrates the aggregate confidence adjustment value computed by the Analytical Reasoner Controller.

target_MS_loc_hyps <--- get all currently active location hypotheses, H, identifying the present target ;    for each currently active location hypothesis, hyp(i), from    target_MS_Ioc_hyps do    {      for each of the confidence adjustment submodules, CA, do      activate CA with hyp(i) as input;  /* now compute the aggregate confidence adjustment using the output   from the confidence adjustment submodules. */     aggregate_adjustment(i) <---     alpha_path_match * path_match(i)       + alpha_velocity * vel_ok(i)       + alpha_path_similar * path_similar(i)       + alpha_velocity_similar * velocity_similar(i)       + alpha_acceleration_similar* acceleration_similar(i)       + alpha_extrapolation * extrapolation_chk(i);     hyp(i).confidence <--- hyp(i).confidence +     aggregate_adjustment(i);    } Mobile Base Station Location Subsystem Description

Introduction

A Mobile Base Station (MBS) 148 may be used to locate a target MS 140 by analyzing received MS location signals from a plurality of different MBS locations and thereby hone-in on or track the target MS. Thus, an MBS 148 allows the location system of the present invention to not only locate such MS's more accurately (since, for example, the MBS may provide additional MS location information to the Location Center not otherwise capable of being provided), but also the MBS can be directed to intercept or track the target MS via on-board MS locating capabilities that may be autonomous from the capabilities of the Location Center.

As a consequence of the MBS 148 being mobile, there are fundamental differences in the operation of an MBS in comparison to other types of BS's. In particular, other types of BS's have fixed locations that are precisely determined and known by the Location Center, whereas a location of an MBS 148 may be known only approximately and may require repeated and frequent re-estimating. Secondly, other types of BS's have substantially fixed and stable communication with the Location Center (via possibly other BS's) and therefore these BS's are more reliable in their in their ability communicate information related to the location of a target MS with the Location Center. An MBS 148, on-the-other-hand, may communicate with the fixed location BS network infrastructure and the Location Center via an on-board transceiver that is effectively an MS 140 integrated into a Location Subsystem built into the (each) MBS 148. Accordingly, if the MBS 148 travels through an area having poor infrastructure signal coverage, then the MBS may not be able to communicate reliably with the Location Center (e.g., in rural or mountainous areas having reduced wireless telephony coverage). Thus, each MBS 148 must be capable of functioning substantially autonomously from the Location Center. This implies that each MBS 148 must be capable of estimating both its own location as well as the location of a target MS 140. Indeed, as one skilled in the art will understand, for most MS location strategies, reliable location estimates for BS's are required.

Accordingly, an MBS 148 must maintain a reliable estimate of its own location for optimal effectiveness in locating a target MS 140. However, since the location of the MBS 148 is repeatedly re-estimated, any one MBS location estimate may be less accurate than what would be required for a fixed location BS 122 without unduly affecting the utility of the MBS since it repeatedly re-estimates its own location.

Additionally, many commercial wireless telephony technologies require all BS's in a network to be very accurately time synchronized both for transmitting MS voice communication as well as for other services such as MS location. Accordingly, the MBS 148 will also require such time synchronization. However, since an MBS 148 may not be in constant communication with the fixed location BS network (and indeed may be off-line for substantial periods of time), at least an on-board highly accurate timing device may be necessary. In one embodiment, such a device may be a commercially available ribidium oscillator.

Such MBS 148 autonomy as discussed above also provides a significant advantage over other types of BS's in that an MBS can be instrumental in locating a target MS 140 in areas where MS location estimation by the Location Center 142 is poor. In fact, MBS's may be used in areas (such as wilderness areas) where there may be no other means for reliably and cost effectively locating a target MS 140 (i.e., there may be insufficient fixed location BS's coverage in an area).

Since the MBS 148 is (or more precisely, includes a scaled down version of) a BS 122, it is capable of performing most typical BS 122 tasks, albeit on a reduced scale. In particular, the base station portion of the MBS 148 can:

-   -   (a) raise/lower its pilot channel signal strength,     -   (b) be in a state of soft hand-off with an MS 140, and/or     -   (c) be the primary BS 122 for an MS 140 (and consequently be in         voice communication with the MS if the MS supports voice         communication).

Further, the MBS 148 can, if it becomes the primary base station communicating with an MS 140, request the MS to raise/lower its power or, more generally, control the communication with the MS. However, since the MBS 148 will likely have substantially reduced telephony traffic capacity in comparison to a standard infrastructure base station, note that the pilot channel for the MBS is preferably a nonstandard pilot channel in that it should not be identified as a conventional telephony traffic bearing BS 122 by MS's seeking normal telephony communication. Thus, a target MS 140 requesting to be located may, depending on its capabilities, either automatically configure itself to scan for certain predetermined MBS pilot channels, or be instructed via the fixed location base station network (equivalently BS infrastructure) to scan for a certain predetermined MBS pilot channel.

Moreover, the MBS 148 has an additional advantage in that it can substantially increase the reliability of communication with a target MS 140 in comparison to the Base Station infrastructure by being able to move toward or track the target MS 140 even if this MS is in (or moves into) a reduced infrastructure BS network coverage area. Furthermore, an MBS 148 may preferably use a directional or smart antenna to more accurately locate a direction of signals from a target MS 140. Thus, the sweeping of such a smart antenna (physically or electronically) provides directional information regarding signals received from the target MS 140. That is, such directional information is determined by the signal propagation delay of signals from the target MS 140 to the angular sectors of one of more directional antennas on-board the MBS 148.

Before proceeding to the details of the MBS Location Subsystem, an example of the operation of an MBS 148 in the context of responding to a 911 emergency is given. In particular, this example describes the high level computational states through which the MBS 148 transitions, these states also being illustrated in the state transition diagram of FIG. 47. Note that this figure illustrates the primary state transitions between these MBS 148 states, wherein the solid state transitions are indicative of a typical “ideal” progression and the dashed state transitions are the primary state reversions due, for example, to difficulties in locating the target MS 140.

Accordingly, initially the MBS 148 may be in an inactive state, wherein the MBS Location Subsystem is effectively available for voice or data communication with the fixed location BS network, but the MS 140 locating capabilities of the MBS are not active. From the inactive state the MBS (e.g., a police or rescue vehicle) may enter an active state once an

MBS operator has logged onto the MBS Location Subsystem of the MBS, such logging being for authentication, verification and journaling of MBS events. In the active state the MBS may be listed by a 911 emergency center and/or the Location Center 142 as eligible for service in responding to a 911 request. From this state, the MBS 148 may transition to a ready state for use in locating and/or intercepting a target MS 140, by performing the following steps: (1a) Performing BS network time synchronization. In one embodiment, when requesting such time synchronization from the BS infrastructure, the MBS 148 will be at a predetermined or well known location so that the MBS time synchronization may adjust for a known amount of signal propagation delay in the synchronization signal.

-   -   (1b) Establishing the location of the MBS 148. In one         embodiment, this may be accomplished by, for example, an MBS         operator identifying the predetermined or well known location at         which the MBS 148 is located.     -   (1c) Communicating with, for example, the 911 emergency center         via the fixed location BS infrastructure to identify the MBS 148         as in the ready state. Thus, in the ready state, as the MBS 148         moves, it has its location repeatedly (re)-estimated via, for         example, GPS signals, Location Center MBS estimates from the         fixed location BS infrastructure and an on-board deadreckoning         MBS location estimator according to the programs described         hereinbelow. However, note that the accuracy of the BS time         synchronization and the accuracy of the MBS 148 location may         need to both be periodically recalibrated according to (1a) and         (1b) above.

Assuming a 911 signal is transmitted by an MS 140 (denoted the target MS), this signal is transmitted, via the fixed location BS infrastructure, to the 911 emergency center and the Location Center 142, and assuming the MBS 148 is in the ready state, if a corresponding 911 emergency request is transmitted to the MBS (via the BS infrastructure) from the 911 emergency center or the Location Center, then the MBS may transition to a seek state by performing the following steps:

-   -   (2a) Communicating with, for example, the 911 emergency center         via the fixed location BS network to receive the PN code for the         target MS to be located.     -   (2b) Obtaining a most recent target MS location estimate from         either the 911 emergency center or the Location Center.     -   (2c) Inputting by the MBS operator an acknowledgment of the         target MS to be located.

Subsequently, when the MBS 148 is in the seek state, the MBS may commence toward the target MS location estimate provided. Note that it is likely that the MBS is not initially in direct signal contact with the target MS. Accordingly, in the seek state the following steps are, for example, performed:

-   -   (3a) The Location Center or the 911 emergency center may inform         the target MS, via the fixed location BS network, to lower its         threshold for soft hand-off and at least periodically boost its         location signal strength. Additionally, the target MS may be         informed to scan for the pilot channel of the MBS 148. Note the         actions here are not, per 5e, actions performed by the MBS 148         in the “seek state”; however, these actions are given here for         clarity and completeness.     -   (3b) Repeatedly, as sufficient new MS location information is         available, the Location Center provides new MS location         estimates to the MBS via the fixed location BS network.     -   (3c) The MBS repeatedly provides the MBS operator with new         target MS location estimates provided substantially by the         Location Center via the fixed location BS network.     -   (3d) The MBS 148 repeatedly attempts to detect a signal from the         target MS using the PN code for the target MS.     -   (3e) The MBS 148 repeatedly estimates its own location (as in         other states as well), and receives MBS location estimates from         the Location Center.

Assuming that the MBS 148 and target MS 140 detect one another (which typically occurs when the two units are within 0.25 to 3 miles of one another), the MBS enters a contact state when the target MS enters a soft hand-off state with the MBS. Accordingly, in the contact state, the following steps are, for example, performed:

-   -   (4a) The MBS 148 repeatedly estimates its own location.     -   (4b) Repeatedly, the Location Center 142 provides new target MS         and MBS location estimates to the MBS 148 via the fixed location         BS network.     -   (4c) Since the MBS 148 is at least in soft hand-off with the         target MS 140, the MBS can estimate the direction and distance         of the target MS itself using, for example, detected target MS         signal strength and TOA. as well as using any recent Location         Center target MS location estimates.     -   (4d) The MBS 148 repeatedly provides the MBS operator with new         target MS location estimates provided using MS location         estimates provided by the MBS itself and by the Location Center         via the fixed location BS network.

When the target MS 140 detects that the MBS pilot channel is sufficiently strong, the target MS may switch to using the MBS 148 as its primary base station. When this occurs, the MBS enters a control state wherein the following steps are, for example, performed:

-   -   (5a) The MBS 148 repeatedly estimates its own location.     -   (5b) Repeatedly, the Location Center 142 provides new target MS         and MBS location estimates to the MBS 148 via the fixed location         BS network.     -   (5c) The MBS 148 estimates the direction and distance of the         target MS 140 itself using, for example, detected target MS         signal strength and TOA. as well as using any recent Location         Center target MS location estimates.     -   (5d) The MBS 148 repeatedly provides the MBS operator with new         target MS location estimates provided using MS location         estimates provided by the MBS itself and by the Location Center         142 via the fixed location BS network.     -   (5e) The MBS 148 becomes the primary base station for the target         MS 140 and therefore controls at least the signal strength         output by the target MS.

Note, there can be more than one MBS 148 tracking or locating an MS 140. There can be more than one target MS 140 to be tracked concurrently and each target MS being tracked may be stationary or moving.

MBS Architecture

An MBS 148 uses MS signal characteristic data for locating the MS 140. The MBS 148 may use such signal characteristic data to facilitate determining whether a given signal from the MS is a “direct shot” or an multipath signal. That is, the MBS 148 may attempt to determine when an MS signal is received directly (i.e., no multipath) from the MS 140 by determining whether the signal strength, and TOA agree in distance estimates for the MS. Note, other signal characteristics may also be used, if there are sufficient electronics and processing available to the MBS 148; i.e., determining signal phase and/or polarity as other indications of receiving a “direct shot” from an MS 140.

In one embodiment, the MBS 148 may have multiple command schedulers. In particular, a scheduler for commands related to communicating with the Location Center 142, a scheduler for commands related to GPS communication, a scheduler for commands related to the MBS dead reckoning subsystem and a scheduler for communicating with the MS(s) being located. Further, it is assumed that there is sufficient hardware and/or software to appear to perform commands in different schedules substantially concurrently.

Each MBS 148 has a plurality of MBS location estimators (or hereinafter also simply referred to as location estimators) for determining the location of the MBS. Each such location estimator computes MBS location information such as MBS location estimates, changes to MBS location estimates, or an MBS location estimator may be an interface for buffering and/or translating a previously computed MBS location estimate into an appropriate format. In particular, the following MBS location estimators may be provided in the MBS:

-   -   (a) a GPS location estimator for computing an MBS location         estimate using GPS signals,     -   (b) a Location Center location estimator for buffering and/or         translating an MBS estimate received from the Location Center,     -   (c) an MBS operator location estimator for buffering and/or         translating manual MBS location entries received from an MBS         location operator, and     -   (d) in some MBS embodiments, an LBS location estimator for the         activating and deactivating of LBS's. Note that, in high         multipath areas and/or stationary base station marginal coverage         areas, such low cost “location base stations” (LBS) may be         provided whose locations are fixed and accurately predetermined         and whose signals are substantially only receivable within a         relatively small range (e.g., 2000 feet), the range potentially         being variable. Thus, by communicating with the LBS's 152         directly, the MBS 148 may be able to quickly use the location         information relating to the location base stations for         determining its location by using signal characteristics         obtained from the LBSs.         Note that MBS location estimators such as those above that         provide actual MBS location rather than, for example, a change         in MBS location are denoted as Baseline Location Estimators.         Further note that it is an aspect of the present invention that         additional MBS baseline location estimators may be easily         integrated into the MBS Location Subsystem as such baseline         location estimators become available. For example, a baseline         location estimator that receives MBS location estimates from         reflective codes provided, for example, on streets or street         signs can be straightforwardly incorporated into the MBS         location subsystem.

Note that a plurality of MBS location technologies and their corresponding MBS location estimators are utilized due to the fact that there is currently no single location technology available that is both sufficiently fast, accurate and accessible in substantially all terrains to meet the location needs of an MBS 148. For example, in many terrains GPS technologies may be sufficiently accurate; however, GPS technologies: (a) require a relatively long time to provide an initial location estimate (e.g., 2-10 minutes); (b) when GPS communication is disturbed, it may require an equally long time to provide a new location estimate; (c) clouds, buildings and/or mountains can easily prevent location estimates from being obtained; (d) in some cases signal reflections can substantially skew a location estimate. As another example, an MBS 148 may be able to use triangulation or trilateralization technologies to obtain a location estimate; however, this assumes that there is sufficient (fixed location) infrastructure BS coverage in the area the MBS is located. Further, it is well known that the multipath phenomenon can substantially distort such location estimates. Thus, for an MBS 148 to be highly effective in varied terrains, an MBS is provided with a plurality of location technologies, each supplying an MBS location estimate.

In fact, much of the architecture of the Location Center 142 could be incorporated into an MBS 148. For example, in some embodiments of the MBS 148 the following FOMs may have similar location models incorporated into the MBS:

-   -   (a) a variation of the Distance Model wherein TOA signals from         communicating fixed location BS's are received (via an MBS         transceiver) by the MBS and used for providing a location         estimate;     -   (b) a variation of the Neural Net Model(s) (or more generally a         location learning or a classification model) may be used to         provide MBS location estimates via, for example, learned         associations between fixed location BS signal characteristics         and geographic locations;     -   (c) a LBS Location Model for providing an MBS with the ability         to activate and deactivate LBS's to provide (positive) MBS         location estimates as well as negative MBS location regions         (i.e., regions where the MBS is unlikely to be since one or more         LBS's are not detected by the MBS transceiver);     -   (d) one or more MBS location reasoning agents and/or a location         estimate heuristic agents for resolving MBS location estimate         conflicts and providing greater MBS location estimate accuracy.

However, for those MBS location models requiring communication with the BS infrastructure, an alternative embodiment is to rely on the Location Center 142 to perform the computations for at least some of these MBS models. That is, since each of the MBS location models mentioned immediately above require communication with the network of fixed location BS's, it may be advantageous to transmit MBS location estimating data to the Location Center 142 as if the MBS were another MS 140 for the Location Center to locate, and thereby rely on the location estimation capabilities at the Location Center rather than duplicate such models in the MBS 148. The advantages of this approach are that:

-   -   (a) an MBS is likely to be able to use less expensive processing         power and software than that of the Location Center;     -   (b) an MBS is likely to require substantially less memory,         particularly for data bases, than that of the Location Center.         Note that the data base storage requirements may be substantial         for the Location Center 142.

Note that in one embodiment, the confidence for a manual entry of location data by an MBS operator is the highest and location estimates using signal characteristic data from LBSs are the next highest. The confidence for (any) GPS location data is, in general, next highest. Lastly, confidence in a Location Center location data is, in general, lowest. However, such prioritization may vary depending on, for instance, the radio coverage area. In an one embodiment of the present invention, it is an aspect of the present invention that for MBS location data received from the GPS and Location Center, their confidences may vary according to the area in which the MBS 148 resides. That is, if it is known that for a given area, there is a reasonable probability that a GPS signal may suffer multipath distortions and that the Location Center has in the past provided reliable location estimates, then the confidences for these two location sources may be reversed.

In another embodiment of the present invention, if LBS's 156 are distributed in an area, these LBS's may be used for assessing the accuracy of the Location Center 142 and GPS by testing location data from these sources against known LBS locations. Thus, by using this technique, a determination can be made as to which of, for example, the GPS and Location Center MBS estimates are more accurate in a given service area. Alternatively, MBS operators may be requested to occasionally manually enter the location of the MBS 148 when the MBS is stationary for determining the accuracy of various MBS location estimators.

There is an additional important source of location information for the MBS 148 that is incorporated into an MBS vehicle (such as a police vehicle) that has no comparable attribute for the network of fixed location BS's. That is, the MBS 148 may use deadreckoning information provided by a deadreckoning MBS location estimator whereby the MBS may obtain MBS deadreckoning location change estimates. Accordingly, the deadreckoning MBS location estimator may include, for example, an on-board gyroscope, a wheel rotation measurement device (e.g., odometer), and optionally an accelerometer. Thus, such a deadreckoning MBS location estimator periodically provides at least MBS distance and directional data related to MBS movements from a most recent MBS location estimate. More precisely, in the absence of any other new MBS location information, the deadreckoning MBS location estimator outputs a series of new measurements, wherein each such measurement is an estimated change (or delta) in the position of the MBS 148 between a request input timestamp and a closest time prior to the timestamp, wherein a previous deadreckoning terminated. Thus, each deadreckoning location change estimate includes the following fields:

-   -   (a) an “earliest timestamp” field for designating the start time         when the deadreckoning location change estimate commences         measuring a change in the location of the MBS;     -   (b) a “latest timestamp” field for designating the end time when         the deadreckoning location change estimate stops measuring a         change in the location of the MBS; and     -   (c) an MBS location change vector.

That is, the “latest timestamp” is the timestamp input with the deadreckoning request and the “earliest timestamp” is the timestamp of the closest time, T, prior to the latest timestamp, wherein a previous deadreckoning output has latest timestamp equal to T.

Further, the frequency of such measurements may be adaptively provided depending on the velocity of the MBS 148 and/or the elapsed time since the most recent MBS location update. Accordingly, the architecture of the MBS on-board location system must be such that it can utilize such deadreckoning information for estimating the location of the MBS 148.

In one embodiment of the MBS location subsystem described in further detail hereinbelow, the outputs from the deadreckoning MBS location estimator are used to synchronize MBS location estimates from different MBS baseline location estimators. That is, since such a deadreckoning output may be requested for substantially any time from the deadreckoning MBS location estimator, such an output can be requested for substantially the same point in time as the occurrence of the signals from which a new MBS baseline location estimate is derived. Accordingly, such a deadreckoning output can be used to update other MBS location estimates not using the new MBS baseline location estimate.

It is assumed that the error with dead reckoning increases with deadreckoning distance. Accordingly, it is an aspect of the embodiment of the MBS location system that when incrementally updating the location of the MBS 148 using deadreckoning and applying deadreckoning location change estimates to a “most likely area” in which the MBS 148 is believed to be, this area is incrementally enlarged as well as shifted. The enlargement of the area is used to account for the inaccuracy in the deadreckoning capability. Note, however, that the deadreckoning MBS location estimator is periodically reset so that the error accumulation in its outputs can be decreased. In particular, such resetting occurs when there is a high probability that the location of the MBS is known. For example, the deadreckoning MBS location estimator may be reset when an MBS operator manually enters an MBS location or verifies an MBS location, or computed MBS location has sufficiently high confidence.

Thus, due to the MBS 148 having less accurate location information (both about itself and the MS 140), and further that deadreckoning information must be utilized in maintaining MBS location estimates, a first embodiment of the MBS location system architecture is somewhat different from the Location Center 142 system architecture. That is, the architecture of this first embodiment is simpler than that of the architecture of the Location Center 142. However, it important to note that, at a high level, the architecture of the Location Center may also be applied for providing a second embodiment of the MBS location system, as one skilled in the art will appreciate after reflecting on the architectures and processing provided at an MBS 148 and the Location Center 142. For example, an MBS location system architecture may be provided that has one or more First Order Models (as discussed regarding the architecture of the Location Center) whose output is supplied to, for example, a blackboard or expert system for resolving MBS location estimate conflicts, such an architecture being analogous to one embodiment of the Location Center architecture.

Furthermore, it is also an important aspect of the present invention that, at a high level, the MBS location system architecture as described hereinbelow may also be applied to the Location Center 142. That is, as one skilled in the art will appreciate after reflecting on the architectures and processing provided at an MBS 148 and the Location Center 142. For example, in one embodiment of the Location Center 142, each of the First Order Models of the Location Center may provide its MS location hypothesis outputs to a corresponding “location track”, analogous to the MBS location tracks described hereinbelow, and subsequently, a most likely MS current location estimate may be developed in a “current location track” using the most recent location estimates in other location tracks as also described hereinbelow. Note, that the ideas and methods discussed here relating to MBS location estimators and MBS location tracks, and, the related programs hereinbelow are sufficiently general so that these ideas and methods may be applied in a number of contexts related to determining the location of a device capable of movement and wherein the location of the device must be maintained in real time. For example, they may be used by a robot in a very cluttered environment (e.g., a warehouse), wherein the robot has access: (a) to a plurality of robot location estimators that may provide the robot with sporadic location information, and (b) to a deadreckoning MBS location estimator.

Each MBS 148 has a location display where area maps that may be displayed together with location data. In particular, MS location data may be displayed as a nested collection of areas, each smaller nested area being the most likely area within (any) encompassing area for locating a target MS 140. Note that the MBS controller algorithm below may be adapted to receive Location Center data for displaying the locations of other MBSs 148 as well as target MSs 140.

The MBS 148 may constrain any location estimates to streets on a street map. For example, an estimated MBS location not on a street may be “snapped to” a nearest street location. Note that a nearest street location determiner may use “normal” orientations of vehicles on streets as a constraint on the nearest street location. Particularly, if an MBS 148 is moving at typical rates of speed and acceleration, and without abrupt changes direction. For example, if the deadreckoning MBS location estimator indicates that the MBS 148 is moving in a northern direction, then the street snapped to should be a north-south running street.

MBS Data Structure Remarks

Assuming the location estimators that were previously mentioned above, the discussion here refers substantially to the data structures and their organization as illustrated in FIG. 48.

The location estimates (or hypotheses) for an MBS determining its own location each have an error or range estimate associated with the MBS location estimate. That is, each such MBS location estimate includes a “most likely MBS point location” within a “most likely area”. The “most likely MBS point location” is assumed herein to be the centroid of the “most likely area”. In one embodiment of the MBS Location Subsystem, a nested series of “most likely areas” may be provided about a most likely MBS point location. However, to simplify the discussion herein each MBS location estimate is assumed to have a single “most likely area”. One skilled in the art will understand how to provide such nested “most likely areas” from the description herein. Additionally, it is assumed that such “most likely areas” are not grossly oblong; i.e., area cross sectioning lines through the centroid of the area do not have large differences in their lengths. For example, for any such “most likely area”, A, no two such cross sectioning lines of A may have lengths that vary by more than a factor of 2.

Each MBS location estimate also has a confidence associated with it providing a measurement of the perceived accuracy of the MBS being in the “most likely area” of the location estimate.

A (MBS) location track is an data structure (or object) having a queue of a predetermined length for maintaining a temporal (timestamp) ordering of location track entries, wherein each such MBS location track entry is an estimate of the location of the MBS at a particular time.

There is an MBS location track for storing MBS location estimation information from each of the MBS baseline location estimators described above, as well as an additional location track, denoted the “current location track” whose location track entries may be derived from the entries in the other location tracks (described further hereinbelow). Further, for each location track, there is a location track head that is the head of the queue for the location track. The location track head is the most recent (and presumably the most accurate) MBS location estimate residing in the location track. Additionally, for notational convenience, for each location track, the time series of MBS location estimations (i.e., location track entries) in the location track will herein be denoted the path for the location track. Such paths are typically the length of the location track queue containing the path. Note that the length of each such queue may be determined by at least the following factors:

-   -   (i) In certain circumstances (described hereinbelow) location         track entries are removed from the head of the location track         queues so that location adjustments may be made. In such a case,         it may be advantageous for the length of such queues to be         greater than the number of entries that are expected to be         removed;     -   (ii) In determining an MBS location estimate, it may be         desirable in some embodiments to provide new location estimates         based on paths associated with previous MBS location estimates.

Also note that it is within the scope of the present invention that the location track queue lengths may be a length of one.

Each location track entry includes:

-   -   (a) a derived location estimate for the MBS that is derived         using at least one of:         -   (i) at least a most recent previous output from an MBS             baseline location estimator (i.e., the output being an MBS             location estimate);         -   (ii) deadreckoning output information.

Further note that each output from an MBS location estimator has a “type” field that is used for identifying the source of the output.

-   -   (b) an earliest timestamp providing the time/date when the         earliest MBS location information upon which the derived         location estimate for the MBS depends. Note this will typically         be the timestamp of the earliest MBS location estimate (from an         MBS baseline location estimator) that supplied MBS location         information used in deriving the derived location estimate for         the MBS.     -   (c) a latest timestamp providing the time/date when the latest         MBS location information upon which the derived location         estimate for the MBS depends. Note that earliest         timestamp=latest timestamp only for so called “baseline entries”         as defined hereinbelow. Further note that this attribute is the         one used for maintaining the “temporal (timestamp) ordering” of         location track entries.     -   (d) A deadreckoning distance indicating the total distance         (e.g., wheel turns or odometer difference) since the most         recently previous baseline entry for the location track of the         same type as the present location track entry.

For each MBS location track, there are two categories of MBS location track entries that may be inserted into a MBS location track:

-   -   (a) “baseline” entries, wherein each such baseline entry         includes (depending on the location track) a location estimate         for the MBS 148 derived from: (i) a most recent previous output         either from a corresponding MBS baseline location, or (ii) from         the baseline entries of other location tracks (this latter case         being the “current” location track);     -   (b) “extrapolation” entries, wherein each such entry includes a         MBS location estimate that has been extrapolated from the most         recent location track head for the location track (i.e., based         on the track head whose “latest timestamp” is the most recent).         Each such extrapolation entry is computed by using data from a         related deadreckoning location change estimate output from the         deadreckoning MBS location estimator. Each such deadreckoning         location change estimate includes measurements related to         changes or deltas in the location of the MBS 148. More         precisely, for each location track, each extrapolation entry is         determined using: (i) a baseline entry, and (ii) a set of one or         more (i.e., all later occurring) deadreckoning location change         estimates in increasing “latest timestamp” order, Note that for         notational convenience this set of one or more deadreckoning         location change estimates will be denoted the deadreckoning         location change estimate set “associated” with the extrapolation         entry resulting from this set.     -   (c) Note that for each location track head, it is either a         baseline entry or an extrapolation entry. Further, for each         extrapolation entry, there is an most recent baseline entry, B,         that is earlier than the extrapolation entry and it is this B         from which the extrapolation entry was extrapolated. This         earlier baseline entry, B, is hereinafter denoted the baseline         entry associated with the extrapolation entry. More generally,         for each location track entry, T, there is a most recent         previous baseline entry, B, associated with T, wherein if T is         an extrapolation entry, then B is as defined above, else if T is         a baseline entry itself, then T=B. Accordingly, note that for         each extrapolation entry that is the head of a location track,         there is a most recent baseline entry associated with the         extrapolation entry.

Further, there are two categories of location tracks:

-   -   (a) “baseline location tracks”, each having baseline entries         exclusively from a single predetermined MBS baseline location         estimator; and     -   (b) a “current” MBS location track having entries that are         computed or determined as “most likely” MBS location estimates         from entries in the other MBS location tracks.         MBS Location Estimating Strategy

In order to be able to properly compare the track heads to determine the most likely MBS location estimate it is an aspect of the present invention that the track heads of all location tracks include MBS location estimates that are for the same (latest) timestamp. However, the MBS location information from each MBS baseline location estimator is inherently substantially unpredictable. In fact, the only MBS location information that may be considered predicable is the deadreckoning location change estimates from the deadreckoning MBS location estimator in that these estimates may reliably be obtained whenever there is a query for the most recent estimate in the change of the location for the MBS. Consequently, by using a deadreckoning location change estimate in conjunction with each MBS location estimate from an MBS baseline location estimator, the location track heads may be synchronized according to timestamp. More precisely, for each MBS location estimate, E, from an MBS baseline location estimator, the present invention queries the deadreckoning MBS location estimator for a corresponding most recent change in the location of the MBS 148. Accordingly, E and the retrieved MBS deadreckoning location change estimate, C, have substantially the same “latest timestamp”. Thus, the location estimate E may be used to create a new baseline track head for the location track having the corresponding type for E, and C may be used to create a corresponding extrapolation entry as the head of each of the other location tracks. Accordingly, since for each MBS location estimate, E, there is a MBS deadreckoning location change estimate, C, having substantially the same “latest timestamp”, E and C will be hereinafter referred as paired.

Assuming the location estimators that were previously mentioned above, the above location track related definitions are illustrated as in FIG. 48.

The following function is a high level description of an embodiment of a controller for an MBS 148. Additional description of lower level functions invoked by the following controller are provided in APPENDIX A.

-   mobile_base_station_controller( ) -   {     -   wait_for_input_of_first_MBS_location(event); /* “event” is a         record (object) with MBS location data */ WHILE (no MBS operator         input to exit) DO         -   CASE OF (event) /* determine the type of “event” and process             it. */     -   MBS LOCATION DATA RECEIVED FROM GPS:     -   MBS LOCATION DATA RECEIVED FROM LBS:     -   MBS LOCATION DATA RECEIVED FROM ANY OTHER HIGHLY RELIABLE MBS         LOCATION SOURCES         -   (EXCEPT LOCATION CENTER):     -   {         -   MBS_new_est←get_new_MBS_location_using_estimate(event);             -   /* Note, whenever a new MBS location estimate is entered                 as a baseline estimate into the location tracks, the                 other location tracks must be immediately updated with                 any deadreckoning location change estimates so that all                 location tracks are substantially updated at the same                 time. */         -   deadreck_est←get_deadreckoning_location_change_estimate(event);         -    MBS_curr_est←DETERMINE_MBS_LOCATION_ESTIMATE(MBS_new_est,             deadreck_est);         -    if (MBS_curr_est.confidence>a predetermined high confidence             threshold) then             -   reset_deadreckoning_MBS_location_estimator(event);                 -   /* deadreckoning starts over from here. */             -   /* Send MBS location information to the Location Center.                 */         -   if (MBS has not moved since the last MBS location estimate             of this type and is not now moving) then         -   {             -   configure the MBS on-board transceiver leg MBS-MS) to                 immediately transmit location signals to the fixed                 location BS network as if the MBS were an ordinary                 location device (MS);             -   communicate with the Location Center via the fixed                 location BS Infrastructure the following:                 -   (a) a ‘locate me’ signal,                 -   (b) MBS_curr_est,                 -   (c) MBS_new_est and                 -   (d) the limestamp tor the present event.         -   Additionally, any location signal information between the             MBS and the present target MS may be transmitted to the             Location Center so that this information may also be used by             the Location Center to provide better estimates of where the             MBS is. Further, if the MBS determines that it is             immediately adjacent to the target MS and also that its own             location estimate is highly reliable (e.g., a GPS estimate),             then the MBS may also communicate this information to the             Location Center so that the Location Center can: (a)             associate any target MS location signature cluster data with             the fixed base station infrastructure with the location             provided by the MBS, and (b) insert this associated data             into the Location Signature Data Base of the Location Center             as a verified cluster of “random loc sigs”;         -   /* note, this transmission preferably continues (i.e.,             repeats) for at least a predetermined length of time of             sufficient length for the Signal Processing Subsystem to             collect a sufficient signal characteristic sample size. */     -   {     -   else SCHEDULE an event (if none scheduled) to transmit to the         Location Center the following: (a) MBS_curr_est, and (b) the GPS         location of the MBS and the time of the GPS location estimate;     -   /* Now update MBS display with new MBS location; note, MBS         operator must request MBS locations on the MBS display; if not         requested, then the following call does not do an update. */     -   update_MBS_operator_display_with_MBS_est(MBS_curr_est); -   { -   SINCE LAST MBS LOCATION UPDATE     -    MBS HAS MOVED A THRESHOLD DISTANCE: {     -   deadreck_est←get_deadreckoning_l9ocation_change_extimate(event);         -   /* Obtain from MBS Dead Reckoning Location Estimator a new             dead reckoning MBS location estimate having an estimate as             to the MBS location change from the location of the last MBS             location provided to the MBS. */     -   MBS_curr_est←DETERMINE_MBS_LOCATION_ESTIMATE(NULL,         deadreck_est);         -   /* this new MBS estimate will be used in new target MS             estimates*/             update_MBS_display_with_updated_MBS_location(MBS_curr_est);         -   SCHEDULE an event (if none scheduled) to request new GPS             location data for MBS;         -   SCHEDULE an event (if none scheduled) to request             communication with Location Center (LC) related to new MBS             location data;         -   SCHEDULE an event (if none scheduled) to request new LBS             location communication between the MBS and any LBS's that             can detect the MBS;             -   /* Note, in some embodiments the processing of MBS                 location data from LBS's may be performed automatically                 by the Location Center, wherein the Location Center uses                 signal characteristic data from the LBS's in determining                 an estimated location of the MBS.*/         -   SCHEDULE an event (if none scheduled) to obtain new target             MS signal characteristics from MS; */ i.e., may get a better             target MS location estimate now. */         -   }     -   TIMER HAS EXPIRED SINCE LAST RELIABLE TARGET MS LOCATION         INFORMATION OBTAINED: {         -   SCHEDULE an event (if none scheduled) to request location             communication with the target MS, the event is at a very             high priority;         -   RESET timer for target MS location communication; /* Try to             get target MS location communication again within a             predetermined time. Note, timer may dynamically determined             according to the perceived velocity of the target MS. */ }     -   LOCATION COMMUNICATION FROM TARGET MS RECEIVED: {         -   MS_raw_signal_data←get_MS_signal_characteristic_raw_data(event);             -   /* Note, “MS_raw_signal_data” is an object having                 substantially the unfiltered signal characteristic                 values for communications between the MBS and the target                 MS as well as timestamp information.             -   */         -   Construct a message for sending to the Location Center,             wherein the message includes at least “MS_raw_signal_data”             and “MBS_curr_est” so that the Location Center can also             compute an estimated location for the target MS;         -   SCHEDULE an event (if none scheduled) to request             communication with Location Center (LC) for sending the             constructed message:             -   /* Note, this data does not overwrite any previous data                 waiting to be sent to the LC. */         -   MS_signal_data←get_MS_signal_characteristic_data(event);             -   /* Note, the MS signal data obtained above is, in one                 embodiment, “raw” signal data. However, in a second                 embodiment, this data is filtered substantially as in                 the Location Center by the Signal Processing Subsystem.                 For simplicity of discussion here, it is assumed that                 each MBS includes at least a scaled down version of the                 Signal Processing Subsystem (see FIG 46). */ -   MS_new_est←DETERMINE_MS_MOST_RECENT_ESTIMATE(MBS_Curr_est,     MS_Curr_est, MS_signal_data);     -   /* May use forward and reverse TOA, TDOA, signal power, signal         strength, and signal quality indicators. Note. “MS_curr_est”         includes a timestamp of when the target MS signals were         received. */ -   if (MS_new_est.confidence>min_MS_confidence) then -   {     -   mark_MS_est_as_temporary(MS_new_est);         -   /* Note, it is assumed that this MS location estimate is             “temporary” in the sense that it will be replaced by a             corresponding MS location estimate received from the             Location Center that is based on the same target MS raw             signal data. That is, if the Location Center responds with a             corresponding target MS location estimate, E, while             “MS_new_est” is a value in a “moving window” of target MS             location estimates (as described hereinbelow), then E will             replace the value of *MS_new_est”. Note, the moving window             may dynamically vary in size according to, for example, a             perceived velocity of the target MS and/or the MBS. */             -   MS_moving_window←get_MS_moving_window(event);                 -   /* get moving window of location estimates for this                     target MS. */     -   add_MS_estimate_to_MS_location_window(MS_new_est,         MS_moving_window);         -   /* Since any given single collection of measurements related             to locating the target MS may be potentially misleading, a             “moving window” of locaton estimates are used to form a             “composite location estimate” of the target MS. This             composite location estimate is based on some number of the             most recent location estimates determined. Such a composite             location estimate may be, for example, analogous to a moving             average or some other weighting of target MS location             estimates. Thus, for example, for each location estimate             (i.e., at least one MS location area, a most likely single             location, and, a confidence estimate) a centroid type             calculation may be performed to provide the composite             location estimate. */     -   MS_curr_est←DETERMINE_MS_LOCATION_ESTIMATE(MS_moving_window);         -   /* DETERMINE new target MS location estimate. Note this may             an average location or a weighted average location. */     -   remove_scheduled_events(“TARGET_MS_SCHEDULE”, event.MS_ID);         -   /* REMOVE ANY OTHER EVENTS SCHEDULED FOR REQUESTING LOCATION             COMMUNICATION FROM TARGET MS */ -   }     -   else /* target MS location data received but it is not deemed to         be reliable (e.g., too much multipath and/or inconsistent         measurements, so SCHEDULE an event (if none scheduled) to         request new location communication with the target MS, the event         is at a high priority*/         -   add_to_scheculed_events(“TARGET_MS_SCHEDULE”, event.MS_ID);     -   update_MBS_operator_display_with_MS_est(MS_curr_est);         -   /* The MBS display may use various colors to represent             nested location areas overiayed on an area map wherein, for             example, 3 nested areas may be displayed on the map             overlay: (a) a largest area having a relatively high             probability that the target MS is in the area             (e.g., >95%); (b) a smaller nested area having a lower             probability that the target MS is in this area (e.g., >80%);             and (c) a smallest area having the lowest probability that             the target MS is in this area (e.g., >70%). Further, a             relatively precise specific location is provided in the             smallest area as the most likely single location of the             target MS. Note that in one embodiment, the colors for each             region may dynamically change to provide an indication as to             how high their reliability is; e.g., no colored areas shown             for reliabilities below, say, 40%; 40-50% is purple; 50-60%             is blue, 60-70% is green; 70-80% is amber; 80-90% is white;             and red denotes the most likely single location of the             target MS. Further note the three nested areas may collapse             into one or two as the MBS gets closer to the target MS.             Moreover, note that the collapsing of these different areas             may provide operators in the MBS with additional visual             reassurance that the location of the target MS is being             determined with better accuracy. */     -   /* Now RESET timer for target MS location communication to try         to get target MS location communication again within a         predetermined time. */     -   reset_timer(“TARGET_MS_SCHEDULE”, event.MS_ID);     -   } -   COMMUNICATION OF LOCATION DATA TO MBS FROM LOCATION CENTER: {     -   /* Note, target MS location data may be received from the         Location Center in the seek state, contact state and the control         state. Such data may be received in response to the MBS sending         target MS location signal data to the Location Center (as may be         the case in the contact and control states), or such data may be         received from the Location Center regardless of any previously         received target MS location sent by the MBS (as may be the case         in the seek, contact and control states). */     -   if ((the timestamp of the latest MBS location data sent to the         Location Center)<=(the timestamp returned by this Location         Center communication identifying the MBS location data used by         the Location Center for generating the MBS location data of the         present event))         -   then /* use the LC location data since it is more recent             than what is currently being used. */     -   {         -   MBS_new_est←get_Location_Center_MBS_est(event);         -   deadreck_est←get_deadreckoning_location_change_estimate(event);         -   WBS_curr_est←DETERMINE_MBS_LOCATION_ESTIMATE(MBS_new_est,             deadreck_est);         -   if (MBS_curr_est.confidence>a predetermined high confidence             threshold) then             reset_deadreckoning_MBS_location_estimator(event);         -   update_MBS_operator_display_with_MBS_est(MBS_curr_est); } -   if ((the timestamp of the latest target MS location data sent to the     Location Center)<=(the timestamp returned by this Location Center     communication identifying the MS location data used by the Location     Center for generating the target MS location estimate of the present     event))     -   then /* use the MS location estimate from the LC since it is         more recent than what is currently being used.         -   */     -   {         -   MS_new_est←get_Location_Center_MS_est(event);         -   /* This information includes error or reliability estimates             that may be used in subsequent attempts to determine an MBS             location estimate when there is no communication with the LC             and no exact (GPS) location can be obtained. That is, if the             reliability of the target MS's location is deemed highly             reliable, then subsequent less reliable location estimates             should be used only to the degree that more highly reliable             estimates become less relevant due to the MBS moving to             other locations. */         -   MS_moving_window←get_MS_moving_window(event);         -   /* get moving window of location estimates for this target             MS. */     -   if ((the Location Center target MS estimate utilized the MS         location signature data supplied by the MBS) then         -   if (a corresponding target MS location estimate marked as             “temporary” is still in the moving window)             -   then /* It is assumed that this new target MS location                 data is still timely (note the target MS may be moving);                 so replace the temporary estimate with the Location                 Center estimate. *                 -   replace the temporary target MS location estimate in                     the moving window with “MS_new_est”;         -   else /* there is no corresponding “temporary” target MS             location in the moving window; so this MS estimate must be             too old; so don't use it. */         -   else /* the Location Center did not use the MS location data             from the MBS even though the timestamp of the latest MS             location data sent to the Location Center is older that the             MS location data used by the Location Center to generate the             present target MS location estimate. Use the new MS location             data anyway. Note there isn't a corresponding “temporary”             target MS location in the moving window. */             -   add_MS_estimate_to_MS_location_window(MS_new_est); -   }     -   else /* the MS location estimate from the LC is not more recent         than the latest MS location data sent to the LC from the MBS. */         -   if (a corresponding target MS location estimate marked as             “temporary” is still in the moving window)             -   then /* It is assumed that this new target MS location                 data is still timely (note the target MS may be moving);                 so replace the temporary estimate with the Location                 Center estimate.                 -   */             -   replace the temporary target MS location estimate in the                 moving window with “MS_new_est”;     -   else /* there is no corresponding “temporary” target MS location         in the moving window; so this MS estimate must be too old; so         don't use it. */         -   MS_curr_est←DETERMINE_MS_LOCATION_ESTIMATE(MS_moving_window);     -   update_MBS_operator_display_with_MS_est(MS_curr-est);         -   reset_timer(“LC_COMMUNICATION”, event.MS_ID);     -   } -   NO COMMUNICATION FROM LC: {     -   /* i.e., too long a time has elapsed since last communication         from LC. */     -   SCHEDULE an event (if none scheduled) to request location data         (MBS and/or target MS) from the Location Center, the event is at         a high priority;     -   reset_timer(“LC_COMMUNICATION”, event.MS_ID);     -   } -   REQUEST TO NO LONGER CONTINUE LOCATING THE PRESENT TARGET MS: {     -   if (event not from operator) then         -   request MBS operator verification;     -   else {         -   REMOVE the current target MS from the list of MSs currently             being located and/or tracked;     -   SCHEDULE an event (if none scheduled) to send communication to         the Location Center that the current target MS is no longer         being tracked;     -   PURGE MBS of all data related to current target MS except any         exact location data for the target MS that has not been sent to         the Location Center for archival purposes;         -   }     -   } -   REQUEST FROM LOCATION CENTER TO ADD ANOTHER TARGET MS TO THE LIST OF     MSs BEING TRACKED: {     -   /* assuming the Location Center sends MBS location data for a         new target MS to locate and/or track (e.g., at least a new MS ID         and an initial MS location estimate), add this new target MS to         the list of MSs to track. Note the MBS will typtcally be or         transitioning to in the seek state. */     -   if (event not from operator) then         -   request MBS operator verification;     -   else {         -   INITIALIZE MBS with data received from the Location Center             related to the estimated location of the new target MS; /*             e.g., initialize a new moving window for this new target MS;             initialize MBS operator interface by graphically indicating             where the new target MS is estimated to be. */         -   CONFIGURE MBS to respond to any signals received from the             new target MS by requesting location data from the new             target MS;         -   INITIALIZE timer for communication from LC; /* A timer may             be set per target MS on list. */         -   }     -   } -   REQUEST TO MANUALLY ENTER A LOCATION ESTIMATE FOR MBS (FROM AN MBS     OPERATOR); {     -   /* Note, MBS could be moving or stationary. If stationary, then         the estimate for the location of the MBS is given high         reliability and a small range (e.g., 20 feet). If the MBS is         moving, then the estimate for the location of the MBS is given         high reliability but a wider range that may be dependent on the         speed of the MBS. In both cases, if the MBS operator indicates a         low confidence in the estimate, then the range is widened, or         the operator can manually enter a range.*/     -   MS_new_est←get_new_MBS_location_est_from_operator(event; /*The         estimate may be obtained, for example, using a light pen on a         displayed map */     -   if (operator supplies a confidence indication for the input MBS         location estimate) then         MBS_new_est.confidence←get_MBS_operator_confidence_of_estimate(event);     -   else MBS_new_est.confidence←1; /*T This is the highest value for         a confidence. */     -   deadreck_est←get_deadreckoning_location_change_estimate(event);     -   MBS_curr_est←DETERMINE_MBS_LOCATIO_ESTIMATE(MBS_new_est,         deadreck_est);     -   if (MBS_curr_est.confidence>a predetermined high confidence         threshold) then         reset_deadreckoning_MBS_location_estimator(event);     -   update_MBS_operator_display_with_MBS_est(MBS_curr_est);     -   /* Note, one reason an MBS operator might provide a manual MBS         input is that the MBS might be too inaccurate in its location.         Moreover, such inaccuracies in the MBS location estimates can         cause the target MS to be estimated inaccurately, since target         MS signal characteristic values may be utilized by the MBS to         estimate the location of the target MS as an offset from where         the MBS is. Thus, if there are target MS estimates in the moving         window of target MS location estimates that are relatively close         to the location represented by “MBS_curr_est”, then these select         few MS location estimates may be updated to reflect a more         accurate MBS location estimate. */     -   MS_moving_window←get_MS_moving_window(event);     -   if (MBS has not moved much since the receipt of some previous         target MS location that is still being used to location the         target MS)         -   then     -   {         -   UPDATE those target MS location estimates in the moving             window according to the new MBS location estimate here;         -   MS_curr_est←DETERMINE_MS_LOCATION_ESTIMATE(MS_moving_window);             -   updaTe_MBS_operator_display_with_MS_est(MS_curr_est);         -   }     -   } -   }/* end case statement */     Wireless Location Applications

After having determined wireless location from a base technology perspective, several applications are detailed below, which provide the results of the location information to a variety of users in various channels and presentation schemes, for a number of useful reasons and under various conditions. The following applications are addressed: (1.) providing wireless location to the originator or another, using either the digital air interface voice channel or a wireline channel, and an automatic call distributor; (2.) providing wireless location to the originator, or another, using either the digital air interface voice channel or a wireline channel, and a hunt group associated with the central office or a PBS group; (3.) providing wireless location to the originator or another, using either the digital air interface text paging, or short message service communications channel; (4.) providing wireless location to the originator or another, using the Internet, and in one embodiment, using netcasting or “Push” technology; (5.) selective group, multicast individualized directions with optional Conferencing; (6.) rental car inventory control and dispatch; (7.) vocalized directions and tracking; (8.) wireless location and court ruling/criminal incarceration validation; (9.) flexible delivery of wireless location information to public safety answering points; (10.) trigger-based inventory and tracking; (11.) group, e.g., family, safety and conditional notification; (12.) wireless location-based retail/merchandising services; (13.) location-based home/office/vehicle security management; (13.) infrastructure-supported wireless location using hand-actuated directional finding; (14.) infrastructure-supported intelligent traffic and highway management; (15.) Parametric-driven intelligent agent-based location services. Each of these wireless location applications is discussed in detail below.

Providing Wireless Location Using an ACD Application

Referring to FIG. 36, a user (the initiating caller) desiring the location of a target mobile station 140 a, such as a user at a telephone station 162 which is in communication with a tandem switch 489 or a user of an mobile station 140 b, or any other telephone station user, such as a computer program, dials a publicly dialable telephone number which terminates on the automatic call distributor 546 (ACD), associated with the location center 142. If the caller originated the call from a mobile station 140 b, then the call is processed via a base station 122 b to a mobile switch center 112 a. The mobile switch center 112 a recognizes that the call is to be routed to the PSTN 124 via an interoffice trunk interface 600. The PSTN 124 completes the call to the ACD 546, via a trunk group interface 500. Note that the initiating caller could access the ACD 546 in any number of ways, including various Inter-LATA Carriers 492, via the public switched telephone network (PSTN) 124. The ACD 546 includes a plurality of telephone network interface cards 508 which provide telephony channel associated signaling functions, such as pulse dialing and detection, automatic number identification, winking, flash, off-hook voice synthesized answer, dual tone multi frequency (DTMF) detection, system intercept tones (i.e., busy, no-answer, out-of-service), disconnected, call progress, answer Machine detection, text-to-speech and automatic speech recognition. Note that some of these functions may be implemented with associated digital signal processing cards connected to the network cards via an internal bus system. An assigned telephone network interface card 508 detects the incoming call, provides an off-hook (answer signal) to the calling party, then provides a text to speech (TTS) message, via an assigned text-to-speech card 512 indicating the nature of the call to the user, collects the automatic number identification information if available (or optionally prompts the caller for this information), then proceeds to collect the mobile identification number (MIN) to be located. MIN collection, which is provided by the initiating caller through keypad signaling tones, can be achieved in several methods. In one case the network card 508 can request a TTS message via text-to-speech card 512, which prompts the initiator to key in the MIN number by keypad DTMF signals, or an automatic speech recognition system can be used to collect the MIN digits. After the MIN digits have been collected, a location request message is sent to a location application 146. The location application 146, in concert with location application interface 14 (more particularly, L-API-Loc 135, see FIG. 36), in the location system 142, is in communication with the location engine 139. Note that the location engine 139 includes the signal processing subsystem 20, and one or more location estimate modules, i.e., DA module 10, TOA/TDOA module 8 or HBS module 6. The location engine 139 initiates a series of messages, using the location application programming interface (L-API-MSC 136) to the mobile switch center 112 a. The location application programming interface 136 then communicates with one or more mobile switch centers 112 b, to determine whether or not the mobile station 140 a to be located can be located. Conditions affecting the locateability of the mobile station 140 a include, for example: the mobile station 140 a being powered off, the mobile station 140 a not being in communication range, the mobile station 140 a roaming state not being known, the mobile station 140 a not being provisioned for service, and related conditions. If the mobile station 140 a cannot be located then an appropriate error response message is provided to the initiating caller, via e-mail, using the web server 464 in communications with the Internet 468 via an Internet access channel 472 or alternatively the error response message may be sent to a text to speech card 512, which is in communications with the initiating caller via the telephone interface card 508 and the ACD 546, which is in communication via telephony interface circuits 500 to the PSTN 124.

Note that in cases where rendering location estimate information is required on the Internet, the web server 464 can include the provision of a digital certificate key, thus enabling a secure, encrypted communication channel between the location web server 464 and the receiving client. One such digital encryption key capability is a web server provided by Netscape Communications, Inc. and a digital certificate key provided by Verisign, Inc. both located in the state of California, U.S.A.

The PSTN 124 completes routing of the response message to the initiating caller via routine telephony principles, as one skilled in the art will understand. Otherwise the mobile station 140 a is located using methods described in greater detail elsewhere herein. At a high level, the mobile switch center 112 a is in communication with the appropriate base stations 122, and provides the location system 142 with the necessary signal and data results to enable a location estimation to be performed by the location engine 139. Once the location has been determined by the location engine 139 in terms of Latitude, Longitude and optionally height if known (in the form of a text string), the result is provided by to the initiator by inputting the location text string to a text-to-speech card 512, which in turn is in communication with the assigned telephone interface card 508, via the automatic control distributor 546, for completing the communication path and providing the location response back to the initiating user via the telephone interface 500 to the PSTN 124, and from the PSTN 124 to the initiating user.

Alternatively the location results from the location application 146 (e.g., FIGS. 37 and 38) could be provided to the initiating caller or Internet user via a web server 464 in communication with the Internet 468, via an Internet access channel 472 and a firewall 474 (e.g., FIG. 36). In another embodiment, the location results determined by the location application 146 may be presented in terms of street addresses, neighborhood areas, building names, and related means familiar to human users. The alternative location result can be achieved by previously storing a relationship between location descriptors familiar to humans and Latitude and Longitude range values in a map database 538 (FIG. 36). During the location request, the location application 146 accesses the map database 538, providing it with the Latitude and Longitude information in the form of a primary key which is then used to retrieve the location descriptor familiar to humans. Note that to those skilled in the art, the map database 538 and associated messaging between the map database 538 and the location application 146 can be implemented in any number of techniques. A straightforward approach includes defining a logical and physical data model using a relational database and designer environment, such as “ORACLE 2000” for the design and development, using a relational database, such as the “ORACLE 7.3” database.

In an alternative embodiment, the location application 146 may be internal to the location system 142 (e.g. FIG. 37), as one skilled in the art will understand.

Providing Wireless Location Via Hunt Groups Application

Referring to FIGS. 37 and 38, a user—the initiating caller, such as a mobile station 140 a desiring the location of a mobile station 140, signals to the primary base station 122 g, in connection with the mobile switch center 112 via transport facilities 176. The mobile switch center 112 is connected to the PSTN 124, via interoffice trunks 600. The initiating user dials a publicly dialable telephone number which is then routed through an end office 496, to a telephone interface card 508, via a telephone hunt group 500. The hunt group 500 provides a telephony connection to the interface card 247 associated with the location system 142. The hunt group trunk interface 500 is provided from an end office telephone switch 496. Note that the initiating caller could access the telephony interface card 508, via hunt group trunk interface 500 in any number of ways, including an InterLATA Carrier 492, via the public switched telephone network (PSTN) 124. The hunt group trunk interface 500 is in communication with a plurality of telephone interface cards 508. The interface cards 508 provide telephony channel associated signaling functions, such as pulse dialing and detection, automatic number identification, winking, flash, off-hook voice synthesized answer, dual tone multi frequency (DTMF) detection, system intercept tones (i.e., busy, no-answer, out-of-service), disconnected, call progress, answer machine detection, text-to-speech and automatic speech recognition. An assigned network interface card 508 detects the incoming call, provides an off-hook (answer signal) to the calling party, then provides a text to speech (TTS) message indicating the nature of the call to the user, collects the automatic number identification information if available (or optionally prompts the caller for this information), then proceeds to collect the mobile identification number (MIN) to be located. MIN collection can be achieved in several methods. In one case the network card 508 can request a TTS message, generated by a voice synthesizer or text to speech card 512, which prompts the initiator to key in the MIN number by keypad tone signals, or an automatic speech recognition system can be used to collect the MIN digits. After the MIN digits have been collected, a location request message is sent to an application 146 in the location system 142. The application 146 in location system 142 initiates a series of messages to the mobile switch center 112, and optionally to the home location register 460, to determine whether or not the mobile station 140 to be located can be located. If the mobile station 140 cannot be located then an appropriate error response message is provided to the initiating caller, via e-mail, test to speech card 512, web server 464 in communications with the public Internet 468, or similar means. Alternatively the last known location can be provided, along with the time and date stamp of the last location, including an explanation that the current location is not attainable. Otherwise the mobile station 140 is located using methods described in greater detail elsewhere in this patent. At a high level, the mobile switch center 112 is in communication with the appropriate base stations 122 g and 122 h, and provides the location system 142 with the necessary signal and data results to enable a location estimation to be performed by the location system 142. Once the location has been determined by the location system 142 in terms of Latitude, Longitude and optionally height if known (in the form of a text string), the result is provided back to the initiator by inputting the location text string to a text-to-speech card 512, in communication with the assigned telephone interface card 508. The interface card 508 then provides the audible, synthesized message containing the location estimate to the initiating caller. Alternatively the location results could be provided to the initiating caller via a web server 464 in communication with the Public Internet 468, using standard client request-response Internet protocols and technology. location system 142 access to a geographical information system or other mapping system could also be used to further enhance the user understanding of the location on a map or similar graphical display.

Providing Wireless Location Via Text Paging Application

Referring to FIG. 38, a user (the initiating caller) desiring the location of an mobile station 140, such as a wireless user using mobile station 140 who has text paging service provisioned, dials a publicly dialable telephone number, carried to the PSTN 124 which terminates on an end office 496 based hunt group interface 500, which in turn is in communication with the location system 142. The mobile switch center 112, local tandem 317 and interLATA Carrier tandem 362 are in communication with the PSTN 124, as those skilled in the art will understand. Note that the initiating caller could also be a wireline user with an ordinary telephone station 162 in communication with a local tandem 489, connected to the PSTN 124. The initiating location request user could access the telephony interface cards 512 via the hunt group 500. In other embodiments, including various Inter-LATA Carriers 492, via the public switched telephone network (PSTN) 124. The hunt group interface 500 is in communication with a plurality of telephone network interface cards 512, which are in communication with the location application 146. The telephone interface cards 512 provide telephony channel associated signaling functions, such as pulse dialing and detection, automatic number identification, winking, flash, off-hook voice synthesized answer, dual tone multi frequency (DTMF) detection, system intercept tones (i.e., busy, no-answer, out-of-service), disconnected, call progress, answer machine detection, text-to-speech and automatic speech recognition. Note that some of these functions may be implemented with associated digital signal processing cards connected to the network cards via an internal bus system. An assigned telephony interface card 508 detects the incoming call, provides an off-hook (answer signal) to the calling party, then provides, if appropriate, a text to speech (TTS) message indicating the nature of the call to the user, collects the automatic number identification information if available (or optionally prompts the caller for this information), then proceeds to collect the mobile identification number (MIN) to be located by sending a location request message to an application 146 in the location system 142. The mobile station MIN collection, provided through the communications channel established, is sent by the initiating caller through keypad signaling tones. This MIN collection process can be achieved in several methods. In one case the telephony interface card 512 can request a text-to-speech message, generated by a text-to-speech card 512, which prompts the initiator to key in the MIN number by keypad tone signals. In another case an automatic speech recognition system can be used to collect the MIN digits. In either case, after the MIN digits have been collected, a location request message is sent to the location system 142. The location system 142 initiates a series of messages to the mobile switch center 112, via the location applications programming interface (L-API-MSC 136), and optionally to the home location register 460, to determine whether or not the mobile station 140 to be located can in fact be located. Alternatively the last known location can be provided, along with the time and date stamp of the last location, including an explanation that the current location is not attainable. Conditions regarding the locateability of a mobile station include, for example: mobile station 140 powered off, mobile station not in communication range, mobile station roaming state not known, mobile station 140 not provisioned for service, and related conditions. If the mobile station 140 cannot be located then an appropriate error response message is provided to the initiating caller, via the service node (SN) 107 for short messaging service (SMS). The service node is in communication with the location system 142 using a common text paging interface 108. The service node 107 accepts the location text paging message from the location system 142 and communicates a request to page the initiating caller via a typical signaling system 7 link for paging purposes, to the mobile switch center 112. The mobile switch center 112 forwards the location text page information to the initiating caller via the appropriate base stations, to the initiating mobile station caller. Otherwise the mobile station 140 is located using methods described in greater detail elsewhere in this patent. At a high level, the mobile switch center 112 is in communication with the appropriate base stations, and provides the location system 142 with the necessary signal and data results to enable a location estimation to be performed by the location system 142. Once the location has been determined by the location system 142 in terms of Latitude, Longitude and optionally height if known (in the form of a text string). The location result is provided to the initiator by inputting the location text string to the service node 107 for short messaging service (SMS). The service node 107 is in communication with the location system 142 using a common text paging interface 108. The service node 107 accepts the location text paging message from the location system 142 and communicates a request to page the initiating caller via a typical signaling system 7 link 105 for paging purposes, to the mobile switch center 112. The mobile switch center 112 forwards the location text page information to the initiating caller via the appropriate-base stations 122 a or 122 b (not shown in FIG. 38), to the initiating caller, via a text-to-speech card 512, in communication with the assigned telephone interface card 508.

Providing Wireless Location Using Internet Push Technology Application

Referring to FIG. 39, a user (the initiating user) desiring the location of an mobile station 140, who has a push technology tuner 484 associated with the users client workstation 482, selects the location channel in the area, and further specifies the mobile station(s) 140 to be located, with whaf frequency should the location estimate be provided, and other related parameters, such as billing information. The user's client workstation 482 is in communication with the Internet, optionally via an encrypted communications channel (e.g. channel 490) using, for example, Netscape's SSL 3 encryption/decryption technology. A push transmitter 472, connected to the Internet 468 via a web server 464, detects the client workstation 482 users request. The transmitter 472 requests location update information for specified mobile identification numbers through a firewall 474 and a publisher 478, in communication with a location channel application 429 in the location system 142. The location system 142 initiates location requests for all mobile station mobile identification numbers for which location information has been subscribed to, then provides the location results to the location channel application 429.

The location system 142 initiates a series of messages to the mobile switch center 112, via the location applications programming interface (L-API-MSC 136), and optionally to the home location register (HLR) 460, to determine whether or not the mobile station 140 or others, to be located can in fact be located. Alternatively the last known location can be provided, along with the time and date stamp of the last location, including an explanation that current location is not attainable. Conditions regarding the locateability of a mobile station 140 include, for example: mobile station 140 powered off, mobile station not in communication range, mobile station 140 roaming state not known, mobile station 140 not provisioned for service, and related conditions. If the mobile station 140 cannot be located then an appropriate error response message is provided to the initiating client workstation 482, via the push technology components location channel application 429, publisher 478, firewall 474, transmitter 472, web server 464, public Internet 468, to the client workstation 482. A similar communication mechanism is used to provide the client's workstation 482 with attained location information.

Note that the location channel 429 could in fact provide a collection of mobile station 140 mobile identification numbers for location purposes that are grouped by a particular market and/or customer organization segment. for example, location channel number 1 could provide enhanced wireless 9-1-1 service to specific public safety answering points, channel number 2 could provide periodic wireless location information of a fleet of taxi cabs belonging to a particular company, to their dispatch operator, channel 3 could provide wireless location to a control center of a military organization, channel 4 could provide wireless location information of vehicles carrying hazardous materials, to a control center, and so forth.

The location channel application 429 provides the location results to the publisher 478, which provides a method of adding the new location results to the transmitter 472, via firewall 474. The firewall 474, provides protection services between certain systems and the Internet 468, such as preventing malicious users from accessing critical computing systems.

Selective Group, Multicast, Individualized Directions Conferencing Application

The group multicast help, with individualized directions, is an application wherein for members of a group that are authorized and nearest a distressed caller, these members are given text paging message instructions on how to drive or navigate, to reach the initiating distressed caller. Alternatively optional voice synthesis technology could be used to aid one or more members to have spoken instruction giving directions and/or instructions for each member, to help them reach the distressed caller.

Referring to FIG. 40, an individual having a mobile station 140 desires to make a distress call for help, or for some other reason is shown. The distressed caller with mobile station 140 dials a special telephone number, received by base station 122, which then sends the originating call setup request to the mobile switch center 112. The mobile switch center 112 routes the originating call through the PSTN 124 to an automatic call distributor (ACD) 546. The ACD 546 selects an available telephony interface circuit 508, which answers the call and provides introductory information to the caller, such as a greeting message, progress of service, etc., using a voice synthesizer circuit card 512. Note that circuits 508 and 512 may be combined as voice response units. The telephony interface circuit 508 collects the automatic number identification information if available in the call setup message or optionally prompts the caller for this information. This MIN collection process can be achieved in several methods. In one case the network telephony interface card 508 can request a TTS (text to speech) message, generated by a voice synthesizer card 512, which prompts the initiator to key in their MIN number by keypad tone signals. In another case an automatic speech recognition system can be used to collect the MIN digits. In either case after the MIN digits have been collected, a location request message is sent to the location system 142. The location system or location center (LC) 142 initiates a series of messages to the mobile switch center 112, via the location applications programming interface (L-API-MSC 136), to determine whether or not the mobile station 140 to be located can in fact be located. If the mobile station 140 cannot be located then an appropriate error response message is provided to the initiating caller. Otherwise the LC 142 determines the caller's location via methods discussed elsewhere in this patent. While this event is proceeding an application in the LS 142 references the initiating callers location subscriber profile database (554, FIG. 40) to determine if the caller allows others to locate him or her, and specifically which individuals are allowed to be informed of the caller's location.

Assuming the caller allows location information to be sent out to a select group, then the list of members mobile station identification numbers (MIN)s are extracted from the profile database (554, FIG. 40), and an application in the LC 142 initiates a series of messages to the mobile switch center 112, via the location applications programming interface (L-API-MSC 136), to determine the locations of each of the users' mobile station mobile identification numbers associated with the member list. Regarding those mobile station mobile identification numbers whose mobile stations are nearest the distressed caller, each member's mobile station is dialed via a control message sent from an application in the LC 142 to the telephony interface card 508. A voice synthesizer card 512 or text to speech circuit is also patched in the calling circuit path, to announce the purpose of the automated call to each member. The ACD 546 initiates the call request to each member via the PSTN 124, which connects to the mobile switch center 112, that ultimately rings the members mobile station 140 and 148 via base stations 122. An application in the LC 142 identifies a start and finish location destination location for a member, based on his/her current location as being the start location, and the finish location being the distressed callers location at mobile station MIN. The application in the LC 142 initiates a http or similar Internet compatible protocol universal resource locator (URL) request via the web server/client 530 to the public Internet 468, which terminates on a maps, directions web server 534. One such URL known to the authors is Lucent Technologies' http://www.mapsOnUs.com, which is provided for public use. The map/directions server 534 queries the map base 536 via a directions algorithm, and returns to the initiating http request, the location web server 530, with a list of instructions to enable a user to navigate between a start location and end location. Referring to FIG. 41, the information such as shown in the columns labeled “Turn #”, “Directions”, “And Go”, and/or “Total Miles”, can then be parsed from the http response information. Referring now to FIG. 40, this information can then be sent as a short text message, to the relevant mobile station 148 or 140 via the service node 107, using interface 105 to the mobile switch center 112, and relevant base stations 122, assuming each member mobile station has short message service provisioned. If this is not the case, the service node 107 will inform the application within the LS 142, which then initiates an alternative method of sending the start-finish location navigation instructions information via an appropriate voice synthesizer card 512 and associated telephony interface card 508. The interface card 508 initiates an automated call to each appropriate members mobile station 148 and 140, via the telephony path including components ACD 546 in communication with the PSTN 124, which is in communication with the mobile switch center 112. The mobile switch center 112 completes the routing of the automated call to the appropriate mobile station 148 and 140 using base stations 122. The above process is repeated for each nearby member's mobile station, thus allowing all nearby members to be notified that the distressed caller needs help, with navigation instructions to each member, which enables the member to reach the distressed caller. Variations of this application include putting each relevant party in communication with each other via a conference call capability in the ACD 546, with or without providing location information and/or start-finish navigation instructions.

Rental Car Inventory, Tracking and Control Application

An application in the location system utilizes periodic wireless location of appropriate rental cars, control circuits and control communications within the rental car, and secured transactions across the Internet, or similar means, in order to provide various tracking and control functions. Such functions allow rental car agencies to remotely control and operate their rental cars in order to reduce operating costs such as storage and maintenance, as well as provide additional conveniences and services to rental car agency customers.

Referring to FIG. 42, a vehicle 578 containing various sensors and actuators (not shown) used to, for example, lock and unlock car doors, sense door position, keypad depressions, sense the condition of the engine and various subsystems, such as brakes, electrical subsystems, sense the amount of various fluid levels, etc., is in communication with a vehicle-based local area network 572, which is in turn connected to a mobile station 140 containing asynchronous data communications capability. The vehicle-based local area network may optionally contain a computer (not shown) for control and interfacing functions. The mobile station 140 is always in communication, using the radio air interface with at least one base station 122 g, and possibly other base stations 122 h. The base stations 122 g and 122 h are in communication with the mobile switch center 112 via transport facilities 176. The mobile switch center 112 is in communication with the location system 142 and the public switched telephone network 124 via interoffice trunks 600. In addition the mobile switch center 112 is also in communication with the location system 142 via the location system-mobile switch center physical interface 178. The physical interface 178 provides two-way connections to the location applications programming interface (i.e., L-API-MSC 136), which is in communication with a location engine 139, which performs wireless location estimations for the mobile station (140, FIG. 42) which is permanently mounted in the vehicle 578. The location engine 139 represents key components within the location system 142 which together comprise the capability to perform wireless location estimations. The rental car location application 146 is in communications with the location engine 139 for purposes of initiating wireless location requests regarding the mobile station 140, as well as for receiving wireless location responses from the location engine 139. The application 146 is in communications with the automatic call distributor 546 for purposes of initiating and receiving telephone calls to and from the public switch telephone network 124, via hunt group interface 500. As one skilled in the art will appreciate, other interfaces (not shown) beyond hunt groups 500, can alternatively be used, such as ISDN interface circuits, T-carrier and the like. The application 146 is in communication with a web server and client 464, which in turn is in communication with the Internet 468 via an Internet access interface 472. As those in the art will understand, an Internet access interface is typically provided by an Internet service provider, also there are other methods which could be used to complete the Internet connection. The rental car agency contains a workstation or personal computer 582 with an Internet access interface 472 to the Internet 468. The application 146 requests of the location engine 139 to perform a location request periodically regarding the mobile station 140, with the location response information provided the web server and client, 464. For each rental car or vehicle containing a mobile station 140, the location, as well as various information about the rental car or vehicle can be ascertained via the above described infrastructure.

911 Application with Wireless Location of the Caller Reporting an Incident

An application in the location system operates in conjunction with an application in each public safety answering point (PSAP) that together provides various call handling functions to enable the PSAP to perform its work load efficiently and effectively toward unique emergency events unique to a given location. The application pair measures the number of emergency 9-1-1 wireless calls originating from a particular geographical area or location. Upon exceeding a provisional threshold value “X”, the application pair traps the next incoming call from the same location and provides a call screening function via a play announcement and collect digits activity. This activity alerts the originating caller that if their call relates to an incident at a particular location, then they are the “X+1 th” caller who has already notified the PSAP, and that no further caller discussion is required. However, if the caller's intent does not relate to the incident described above, then the caller is requested to press or say “one”, or some similar keypad number, which then is collected and causes the caller to be re-routed to the next available PSAP call taker. Alternatively if the originating caller does not respond within a short time period, then the call is also re-routed to the next available PSAP call taker. The voice announcement may either be synthesized by a text-to-speech card, or an PSAP operator may store a voice message which describes the incident at the above-referenced location.

Visualization Applications Using Wireless Location

An application of the wireless location system disclosed herein can be used to enable geographic visualization applications, wherein one or more geographic areas of interest are presented as visual geographic images or maps with annotations thereon indicative of, e.g., a relative interest a mobile station user may have in such geographic areas. In particular, such geographic areas may be color coded on a map according to an expected interest the user may have in different ones of the areas. For example, a mobile station user may be desirous of finding a parking space in a large parking facility such as at an airport parking facility, municipal parking (on, e.g., downtown streets or parking garages), or a shopping mall. If the parking facility has electronic monitoring for monitoring parking spaces therein, then parking spaces (e.g., for automobiles or other modes of transportation) can be readily identified as being occupied or available via such electronic monitoring so that a mobile station user can view on his/her mobile station a map of the parking facility with a designated color (e.g., bright green) identifying one or more nearby available parking spaces, and optionally providing a route to one of the parking spaces. Of course, there may be no guarantee that the user will arrive at one of the parking spaces prior to it being taken by someone else. However, if another takes the parking space, then the user can be notified of the parking space's unavailability potentially substantially before travelling to the unavailable parking space. Note that notifications of available parking spaces in real time (or nearly so) can be provided by, e.g., marking a center of each parking space with a distinctive insignia or design that can be readily identified via video input from one or more electronic monitoring devices that view the parking spaces. In particular, when a parking space is available, the insignia or design on the parking space is visible to one of the video monitors, and when an automobile (or other vehicle) is parked in the parking space, the insignia or design on the parking space is at least partially occluded (more preferably, substantially occluded). Accordingly, such video input can be provided to computational equipment for recognizing the predetermined insignia(s) or design(s) painted, taped or otherwise attached to the parking spaces. Such symbol recognition computational devices may be modified versions of bar code readers, or, e.g., techniques as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 7,274,823 by Lane, which is fully incorporated herein by reference, wherein symbols embedded in digital video signals are recognized.

Of course, in providing parking space information to the user, both the location of an empty parking space and the users location preferably should be known or determined so that the user may be navigated to an empty parking space. In addition to a service for locating such empty parking spaces for users in, e.g., parking garages, shopping malls, street parking in downtown areas, etc., other services may also be provided which rely on wirelessly locating mobile station users and/or the resources for such users. In particular, such users may request notifications for assisting in locating other resources such as a nearby restaurant having a reduced (or no) wait time for service, a hotel or motel having a vacancy, a campsite at a campground, a theme park (or other) attraction having a reduced (or no) wait time.

The following high level pseudo-code is a simplified illustration of the processing performed regarding user notification of: (1) available resources that cannot be typically reserved prior to actual use, such as available parking spaces, available campsites, available gaming locations (at a machine or gaming table) in a casino, and/or (2) resources (e.g., restaurants, theme park attractions, convention presentations) that are determined to require less user time to access than other similar resources.

User activates, at his/her mobile station (e.g., MS 140, or merely MS herein), an application (APP) that provides   notifications of an availability of one or more resources of interest to the user, at one or more geographical   locations of interest to the user; If not previously authorized, the user authorizes the application to wirelessly locate the MS; Put an identification of the user (or the MS) on a queue of users waiting for one of the resources; The application APP periodically commences requesting wireless locations of the MS at a frequency dependent   upon, e.g., an expected or appropriate speed of the MS, and/or a change in direction of the MS, and an   expected change in the availability of the resources; While (an MS wireless location is periodically received) AND   (the MS is in proximity for still seeking an available resource) AND   (there has been no termination of the application APP by the MS user in seeking one of the resources) AND   (a resource has not been allocated to the MS, more particularly, the user thereof) DO { /* However, when (a resource has been allocated to the MS, more particularly, to the user thereof) OR (all   resources become unavailable) independently of the processing of this “While” loop, then interrupt “While”   loop processing, rollback any resource allocation made in this loop to the user, dequeue the user, and exit   this loop immediately */     For each most recent wireless location of the MS received DO {       AvailResources ← Obtain locations of the currently available resources, wherein these locations         are up dated when there is a change in the status of the currently available resources;         /* the terms “available” and “availability” may be understood as: (1) indicative of an output           providing a binary (e.g., yes/no or true/false) result, and (2) dependent upon a threshold           number of users that can be effectively supported by the resource (e.g., up to a           predetermined threshold number of users can be appropriately supported by the resource           simultaneously or during a time interval, but the resource degrades, fails, and/or is not           appropriately effective when the number of users for the resource exceeds the           predetermined threshold number. */       If (SIZEOF(AvailResources) is zero) then       { If (there is no active timer running to prevent notification) then {           transmit a notification to the MS informing its user that no resources are currently             available;           If (received user input indicates the user wants APP to continue looking for a resource for             the user) then             Send next user notification only when there is an available and unallocated resource,               or, a predetermined elapsed time of a timer (activated here) has expired, e.g., 3               minutes;           }         Else Exit While loop;       } ElseIf (all resources are allocated, but at least one is available) then       { If (there is no active timer running to prevent notification) then {           transmit a notification to the MS informing its user that a resource may be available, but all               have been allocated;           If (received user input indicates the user wants APP to continue looking for a resource for             the user) then             Send next user notification only when there is an available and unallocated resource,               or, a predetermined elapsed time of a timer (activated here) has expired, e.g., 3               minutes;           }       } ElseIf (the location of the user's MS is near an available and unallocated resource) AND (no other           user, that has been seeking a resource longer, is at least as near the available and           unallocated resource) then {             allocate the resource to the user;             transmit a notification to the MS informing its user of an available resource, and               provide directions to the resource; the notification may include information for               navigating the user to the resource; such information may be graphically provided               on a map showing the location of the user and/or the resource;             dequeue the user, but save user's state in case user needs to be re-queued due to               the resource being taken by another before the user gets it;             delete any active timer for the user;             }     } ENDDO } ENDDO; If (the user allocated resource becomes unavailable) AND (the user's MS is not at the resource) AND (the user   has not obtained, reserved, registered at another one of the resources) then {     Re-queue the user without resetting the user's resource seek time;     GOTO the While loop above; }

Note that machine instructions for embodying variations of the above pseudo-code may be used for routing users to available gaming machines in a casino, routing user's to available attractions in an amusement or theme park, and/or routing user's to the most sparely populated ski lifts at a ski resort. The present disclosure has been presented for purposes of illustration and description. Further, the description herein is not intended to limit the present disclosure to the form disclosed herein. Consequently, variation and modification commiserate with the above teachings, within the skill and knowledge of the relevant art, are within the scope of the present disclosure. The present disclosure is further intended to explain the best mode presently known of practicing the invention as recited in the claims, and to enable others skilled in the art to utilize the present disclosure, or other embodiments derived therefrom, e.g., with the various modifications required by their particular application or uses of the present disclosure. 

What is claimed is:
 1. A method for providing, for each mobile (M) of more than one of a plurality of wireless mobile telecommunication stations including vehicular embodiments thereof, corresponding one or more notifications for a condition related to an event or circumstance for the mobile M or a user thereof, wherein there is a network having a plurality of geographically spaced apart stationary network access units for receiving wireless signals from the mobile M, comprising performing, for the mobile M, by computational equipment a step at each of (a) through (d) following: (a) a step of receiving an electronic input from a first user for a service, the service for providing the corresponding one or more notifications for the mobile M, the input for controlling a data content to a persistent machine data storage; wherein the data content includes: an identification of at least one entity authorized by the first user to be notified of an occurrence of the condition by receiving the one or more notifications, wherein one or more notification criteria are available whose evaluation is for determining whether: the at least one entity is to receive the one or more notifications for the occurrence of the condition; wherein the notification criteria are for at least determining whether the mobile M has moved into or out of one or more zones or areas; (b) subsequently, a step of receiving status information for the mobile M, the status information including geolocation data indicative of a location, L, for the mobile M, wherein: (b-1) the geolocation data is obtained from location indicative measurements of a plurality of wireless signals communicated to or from the mobile M, each signal, S, of the plurality of wireless signals: (i) has a corresponding different location from which the signal S is transmitted to, or received from, the mobile M, and (ii) for the location indicative measurement of the signal S, the location indicative measurement is dependent upon a geographic position of the corresponding different location for the signal S, and (b-2) the status information is wirelessly communicated between the mobile M and the network; (c) a step of using an identification for the mobile M to access the data content in the persistent machine data storage for evaluating the notification criteria using the status information for at least determining whether the mobile M has moved into or out of the one or more zones or areas; and (d) when the notification criteria evaluates to a first, result, a step is performed of notifying the at least one entity by a network transmission of at least one of the one or more notifications, the at least one notification identifying the mobile M, and the at least one notifications including location information for identifying the location L of the mobile M, wherein the location information is determined using the geolocation data.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the condition includes at least one of (a) an emergency or distress call, (b) the mobile M moving into or out of the one or more zones or areas, (c) a sensor input signal provided by a sensor at the mobile M.
 3. The method of claim 1, wherein the step of notifying includes a step of providing routing or direction information to the at least one entity for navigating to the mobile M.
 4. The method of claim 1, wherein the first user is the user of the mobile M.
 5. The method of claim 1, wherein the location indicative measurements include one or more of a signal strength, a signal time delay related measurement, and a characteristic of a multipath signal; and wherein the location indicative measurements includes satellite data obtained from at least one of the plurality of wireless signals from the corresponding different location for the at least one wireless signal, the corresponding different location being a location of a satellite.
 6. The method of claim 1, wherein for at least one mobile (M₁) of the more than one of the plurality of wireless mobile telecommunication stations, further including: a step of obtaining a second status information for the mobile M₁, wherein the second status information includes second geolocation data indicative of a location, L₁, for the mobile M₁, wherein the second geolocation data is obtained from location indicative measurements of a plurality of second wireless signals communicated to or from the mobile M₁, each signal, T, of the second wireless signals having a corresponding different location from which the signal T is transmitted to, or received from, the mobile M₁, the location indicative measurement for each of the corresponding different locations, for the second wireless signals, being indicative of a geographic position of the corresponding different location for the second wireless signals; a step of evaluating a second one or more notification criteria using the second status information for the mobile M₁, for determining an availability of one or more resources, which a user of the mobile M₁ desires to utilize, and a step of transmitting to the mobile M₁ a corresponding notification related to the availability of one of the one or more resources according to a result from the step of evaluating the second one or more notification criteria.
 7. The method of claim 6, further including a step of transmitting at least one navigation instruction to the mobile M₁, the at least one navigation instruction for navigating the user of the mobile M₁ to the one resource.
 8. The method of claim 7, wherein the one resource is one of: (i) a parking space to be utilized for parking a user vehicle, and (ii) a gaming station.
 9. A method, for each mobile (M) of more than one of a plurality of wireless mobile telecommunication stations including vehicular embodiments thereof of providing for a condition related to an event or circumstance of the mobile M or a user thereof a notification related to the condition, wherein there is a network having a plurality of spaced apart stationary network access units, the access units selectively receiving wireless signals from the mobile M as the mobile M moves in an area having wireless coverage provided by the network, comprising performing the following steps by computational equipment: (a) a step of receiving input from a first user who is a subscriber for providing a wireless service to the nubile M, wherein the input is used for establishing a data content in a persistent machine data storage, the data content including an identification by the first user of at least one entity authorized by the first user, to receive an instance of the notification when an occurrence of the condition is detected, wherein one or more notification criteria are available whose evaluation is for determining whether the at least one entity is to receive the instance of the notification related to the occurrence of the condition, wherein the one or more notification criteria are for at least determining whether the mobile M has moved into or out of one or more zones or areas; (b) a step of receiving, from the mobile M, a communication via one of the spaced apart stationary network access units of the network, the communication including status information for the mobile M, the status information including geolocation data indicative of a location, L, for the nubile M, wherein the geolocation data is obtained from location indicative measurements, including related wireless signal transmission device identification data, of a plurality of wireless signals communicated to or from the mobile M, each signal, S, of the plurality of wireless signals having a corresponding different location from which the signal S is transmitted to, or received from, the mobile M; wherein for one of the location indicative measurements for the corresponding different location of each signal S, the one location indicative measurement is indicative of a geographic position of the corresponding different location, and a geographical position of the mobile M relative to the geographic position of the corresponding different location; (c) a step of evaluating at least a portion of the notification criteria for determining whether the status information identifies that the nubile M has moved into or out of the one or more zones or areas; (d) a step of accessing the data content in the persistent machine data storage for identifying the at least one entity to receive the instance of the notification related to the occurrence of the condition; and (e) a step of transmitting, via a transmission on a network, the instance of the notification to the at least one entity, wherein the instance of the notification identifies the mobile M.
 10. The method of claim 9, wherein the instance of the notification includes location information for identifying the location L, the location information determined using the geolocation data; and wherein the location indicative measurements includes GPS data, the GPS data obtained from at least one of the plurality of wireless signals from the corresponding different location, the corresponding different location being a location of a satellite.
 11. The method of claim 10, wherein the location information includes a confidence value, wherein the confidence value provides an indication of reliability or accuracy of at least one location estimate of the mobile M.
 12. The method of claim 10, wherein at least one of the geolocation data and the location information is dependent upon one of: triangulation, a trilateration, and a multilateration wireless location determining process; wherein the one of the triangulation, the trilateration, and the multilateration uses a portion of the location indicative measurements.
 13. The method of claim 10, wherein the location indicative measurements include one or more of a signal strength; a signal time delay, and a characteristic of a multipath signal; wherein the one or more of the signal strength, the signal time delay, and the characteristic of a multipath signal are for determining a location estimate of the mobile M, the location estimate provided in the location information.
 14. The method of claim 9, further including a step of establishing a call between mobile M and the at least one entity.
 15. The method of claim 9, further including a step of determining that the at least one entity is nearer for reaching the mobile M than another entity.
 16. The method of claim 2, further including a step of activating a conference call between the at least one entity, the mobile M, and another entity.
 17. The method of claim 10 wherein for at least one mobile (M₁) of the more than one of the plurality of wireless mobile telecommunication stations, further including: a step of obtaining a second status information for the mobile M₁, wherein the second status information includes second geolocation data indicative of a location, L₁, for the mobile M₁; wherein the second geolocation data is obtained from particular location indicative measurements of a plurality of second wireless signals communicated to or from the mobile M₁; wherein each signal, T, of the second wireless signals has a distinct corresponding location from which the signal T is transmitted to, or received from, the mobile M₁; wherein for each signal T, there is one or more of the particular location indicative measurements obtained from the distinct corresponding location, the one or more particular location indicative measurements being dependent upon a geographic position of the distinct corresponding location; a step of second evaluating at least a portion of a second notification criteria for determining whether the second status information identifies that the mobile M₁ has moved into or out of second one or more particular zones or areas; a step of second accessing a second data content in the persistent machine data storage far identifying a second entity, allowed by a second user who is a subscriber for providing the wireless service to the mobile M₁, to receive a notification related to an occurrence of a condition that includes movement of the mobile M₁ into or out of the second one or more particular zones or areas; wherein second status information is wirelessly obtained from another network different from the network, wherein the network and the another network are operated by different commercial mobile radio service providers.
 18. The method of claim 9, wherein for at least one mobile (M₁) of the more than one of the plurality of wireless mobile telecommunication stations, further including: a step of obtaining a second status information for the mobile M₁, wherein the second status information includes second geolocation data indicative of a location, L₁, for the mobile M₁; wherein the second geolocation data is obtained from second location indicative measurements of a plurality of second wireless signals communicated to or from the mobile M₁; wherein each signal, T, of the second wireless signals has a corresponding distinct location from which the signal T is transmitted to, or received from, the mobile M₁; wherein for each signal T, there is one or more of the second location indicative measurements obtained from the corresponding distinct location, the one or more second location indicative measurements being dependent upon a geographic position of the corresponding distinct location; a step of evaluating one or more second notification criteria using the second status information for the mobile M₁, for determining an availability of one or more resources, which a user of the mobile M₁ desires to utilize, and a step of transmitting to the mobile M₁ a corresponding notification related to the availability of one of the one or more resources according to a result from the step of evaluating the one or more second notification criteria.
 19. The method of claim 18, further including a step of transmitting at least one navigation instruction to the mobile M₁, the at least one navigation instruction for navigating the user of the mobile M₁ to the one resource.
 20. The method of claim 19, wherein the one resource is one of: (i) a parking space to be utilized for parking a user vehicle, and (ii) a gaming station.
 21. The method of claim 19, wherein the one resource is one of a restaurant, a theme park attraction, and a convention presentation.
 22. The method of claim 9, further including a step of providing routing or direction information to the at least one entity for navigating to the mobile M.
 23. The method of claim 22, wherein the at least one entity receives at least one navigational direction via the network, wherein the at least one navigational direction is for navigating the at least one entity to the mobile M, and the at least one navigational direction is audibly provided.
 24. The method of claim 9, further including a step of selecting the at least one entity for providing thereto the instance of the notification, wherein the step of selecting is dependent upon a proximity of the at least one entity to the mobile M.
 25. The method of claim 24, wherein the at least one entity is a person identified by the first user, and said step of selecting includes a step of determining an authorization for the at least one entity to obtain the instance of the notification.
 26. The method of claim 9, wherein the notification criteria include a condition for determining whether the mobile M is within a predetermined proximity of one or more merchants.
 27. The method of claim 9, wherein the notification criteria includes a condition for determining whether the mobile M has moved into a zone or area such that the mobile M is in proximity for navigational directions to be provided to the user of the mobile M for moving to a resource to be utilized by the user of the mobile M.
 28. The method of claim 9, wherein the notification criteria include a condition that is dependent upon a sensor signal indicative of a change in acceleration at the mobile M.
 29. The method of claim 9, wherein the first user is the user of the mobile M.
 30. The method of claim 9, wherein the geolocation data is for a previous location of the mobile M when a current location estimate of the mobile M is unavailable.
 31. The method of claim 9, wherein the first user accesses the persistent machine data storage via an Internet for establishing the data content.
 32. A system for providing a notification of a condition related to an event or circumstance of a mobile M or a user thereof, the mobile M being any one of a plurality of wireless mobile telecommunication stations, including vehicular embodiments thereof; for wirelessly communicating with a network having a plurality of spaced apart stationary network access units, the access units selectively receiving wireless communications from the mobile M as the mobile M moves in an area having wireless coverage provided by the network, comprising: (a) an electronic communications interface for communicating one or more location related messages with the mobile M, via one of the access units of the network, wherein the messages include status information of the mobile M or the user thereof, the status information including geolocation data indicative of a location, L, for the mobile M; wherein (i) the geolocation data is obtained from location indicative measurements of a plurality of wireless signals communicated to or from the mobile M, each of the wireless signals having a corresponding different location for being transmitted to, or received from, the mobile M, and (ii) for each such corresponding different location, there is a particular one or more of the location indicative measurements that is indicative of a geographic position of the such corresponding different location, the particular one or more location indicative measurements being for one of the wireless signals having the such corresponding different location for being transmitted to, or received from, the mobile M; (b) a location based service operably provided on electronic equipment for communicating with the network or an Internet to receive input, and for providing the location based service as related to the mobile M; wherein the input is used for accessing a data content in a persistent machine data storage, the data content includes (a-1) and (a-2) following: (a-1) an identification of at least one entity authorized by the user, to receive an instance of the notification when an occurrence of the condition is detected, and (a-2) one or more notification criteria whose evaluation is for determining whether the at least one entity is to receive an instance of the notification related to the occurrence of the condition, wherein the one or more notification criteria are for at least determining whether the mobile M has moved into or out of one or more zones or areas; wherein the location based service is configured on the electronic equipment to perform (b-1) and (b-2) following: (b-1) evaluate at least a portion of the one or more notification criteria for determining whether the status information identifies that the nubile M has moved into or out of the one or more zones or areas; and (b-2) access the data content in the persistent machine data storage for identifying the at least one entity to receive the instance of the notification related to the occurrence of the condition; and wherein the electronic communications interface transmits the instance of the notification to the at least one entity, wherein the instance of the notification provides information related to the occurrence for the mobile M.
 33. The system of claim 32, wherein the electronic communications interface includes (1) a first programming interface component that communicates with a home location register for the mobile M to determine a previous location of the mobile M, and (2) an automatic call distributor that communicates with the at least one entity.
 34. The system of claim 32, wherein the instance of the notification includes location information for identifying the location L, the location information determined using the geolocation data.
 35. The system of claim 34, wherein the location based service initiates a transmission of navigation information to the at least one entity for navigating the at least one entity and the mobile M together.
 36. A method for providing for each mobile (M) of more than one of a plurality of wireless mobile telecommunication stations, including vehicular embodiments thereof corresponding one or more notifications for a condition being an event or circumstance for the mobile M or a user thereof, wherein there is a network having a plurality of geographically spaced apart stationary network access units for receiving wireless signals from the mobile M, comprising performing, for the mobile M, the following steps by computational equipment: (a) a step of receiving an electronic input related to the user for a service, the service for providing the corresponding one or more notifications, the input used for providing the service according to a data content in a persistent machine data storage; wherein the data content includes information used in authorizing at least one entity to be notified of the condition occurring, the at least one entity notified by receiving at least one of the corresponding one or more notifications; (b) subsequently, a step of receiving status information including (i) data identifying the mobile M, (ii) information related to an occurrence of the condition, and (iii) geolocation data indicative of a location, L, for the mobile M, wherein (b-1) and (b-2) following hold: (b-1) the geolocation data is obtained using location indicative measurements of signals, S, communicated wirelessly to or from the mobile M, at least two of the signals S corresponding to different locations; wherein for each of the different locations the corresponding signal S therefor is: (i) wirelessly transmitted from the different location and received by the mobile M, or (i) wirelessly received, by one of the access units from a transmission by the mobile M; wherein for each of the different locations, the geolocation data is dependent upon a geographic position of the different location; and (b-2) the status information is wirelessly communicated between the mobile M and the network; (c) a step of using the data identifying the mobile M to access the data content in the persistent machine data storage, the data content accessed for determining the at least one entity to be notified regarding the occurrence of the condition; wherein at least one of: (c-1) identifying the occurrence of the condition, and (c-2) the determining the at least one entity is dependent upon: a location of the mobile M obtained from the geolocation data, or a determination that the mobile M has moved into or out of one or more zones or areas; (d) a step of providing, for telecommunication transmission, at least one notification for the at least one entity, the at least one notification identifying the mobile M, and the at least one notification including location related information for identifying the location, L, for the mobile M, wherein the location related information is obtained using the geolocation data; wherein, in response to determining the at least one entity, at least a three party telecommunications conference call is established, parties to the conference call including the user of the mobile M and the at least one entity.
 37. The method of claim 36, wherein the status information is wirelessly received in response to a network transmission corresponding to a vehicle sensor output signal.
 38. The method of claim 36, further including providing routing or direction information to the at least one entity for navigating to the mobile M.
 39. The method of claim 36, wherein the location indicative measurement includes, for each of the different locations, one of: (i) a signal strength, (ii) a signal transmission time, and (iii) one or more characteristics of signal multipath wherein the one or more characteristics are dependent upon a change to one or more wireless signal transmissions such that each such change is dependent upon a wireless signal result of one or more objects impinging upon a wireless path of one of the wireless transmissions, wherein the wireless signal transmissions each includes one of the signals S corresponding to one of the different locations; and further including a step of inputting the geolocation data, dependent on the one or more characteristics, into a similarity determining computational machine that determines location related data for obtaining the location related information, the similarity determining computational machine performing a pattern recognition between: (i) signal characteristics of wireless transmission paths of signals S, and (ii) previously obtained signal characteristics from a plurality wireless transmission paths.
 40. The method of claim 36, wherein the location indicative measurements (i) includes data D, obtained from transmitters not supported on the surface of the Earth, for locating the mobile unit M, or (ii) are used to perform one of a triangulation, a trilateration and a multilateration according to geographic positions of the access units for obtaining the location related information.
 41. The method of claim 40, wherein each of the location related information and the geolocation data is dependent upon information from the data D, the information indicative of a distance between (i) the mobile M, and (ii) one of the transmitters.
 42. The method of claim 36, wherein a pattern recognition is performed for obtaining the location related information, wherein the pattern recognition determines a similarity between (i) one or more wireless characteristics, the one or more wireless characteristics dependent upon the location indicative measurements, and (ii) wireless signal characteristics indicative of previously determined geographic locations; wherein the one or more wireless characteristics are dependent upon a change to one or more wireless signal transmissions such that each such change is dependent upon a wireless signal result of one or more objects impinging upon a wireless path of one of the wireless transmissions, wherein the wireless signal transmissions each includes one of the signals S.
 43. The method of claim 36, wherein the location related information is used to navigate the at least one entity to the mobile M.
 44. The method of claim 36, wherein for the information related to the occurrence of the condition includes data for contacting an entity for dispatching an emergency response to the user of the mobile.
 45. The method of claim 36, further including a step of authorizing, by the user, the at least one entity to receive the at least one notification.
 46. The method of claim 36, further including a step of selecting the at least one entity to be notified for receiving the at least one notification.
 47. The method of claim 46, wherein the step of selecting is dependent on a step of determining an indication of a proximity of the at least one entity to the mobile M, the indication of the proximity determined.
 48. The method of claim 47, wherein the indication of the proximity includes a distance of the at least one entity to the mobile M.
 49. The method of claim 46, wherein the step of selecting selects a second entity, the second entity for assisting the user when the second entity travels to the mobile M, wherein the conference call includes the second entity.
 50. The method of claim 36, wherein the at least one notification is provided to the at least one entity by a telephony call.
 51. The method of claim 36, wherein the step of providing the at least one notification activates an automatic call distributor for providing the at least one notification to the at least one entity.
 52. The method of claim 36, wherein the occurrence of the condition includes an air bag deployment.
 53. The method of claim 36, wherein the occurrence of the condition includes a vehicle crash or accident.
 54. The method of claim 36, wherein the at least one notification is determined remotely from the mobile M.
 55. The method of claim 36, wherein the at least one of (c-1) and (c-2) is dependent upon the mobile M having moved into or out of the one or more zones or areas.
 56. The method of claim 36, wherein the at least one entity obtains navigation directions for traveling to the mobile M.
 57. The method of claim 36, wherein an Internet website is contacted for obtaining the status information.
 58. A method for providing for each mobile (M) of more than one of a plurality of wireless mobile telecommunication stations, including vehicular embodiments thereof corresponding one or more notifications for a condition being an event or circumstance related to the mobile M or a user thereof wherein there is a network having a plurality of geographically spaced apart stationary network access units for receiving wireless signals from the mobile M, comprising performing, for the mobile M, the following steps by computational equipment: (a) a step of receiving an electronic input related to the user for a service, the service for providing the corresponding one or more notifications related to the mobile M or the user thereof; the input used for establishing the service according to a data content in a persistent machine data storage; wherein the data content includes information used in selecting at least one entity to be notified of the condition occurring, the at least one entity notified by receiving at least one of the corresponding one or more notifications; (b) subsequently, a step of receiving status information including (i) data identifying the mobile M, (ii) information related to an occurrence of the condition, and (iii) geolocation data indicative of a location, L, for the mobile M, wherein (b-1) and (b-2) following hold: (b-1) the geolocation data is obtained using location indicative measurements of signals, S, each signal S communicated wirelessly to or from the mobile M, at least two of the signals S having corresponding different locations, each of the corresponding different locations for one of (i) wirelessly transmitting one of the signals S for receiving by the mobile M, or (ii) wirelessly receiving, from the mobile M, one of the signals S by one of the access units; wherein for each of the corresponding different locations, the geolocation data is dependent upon data indicative of a geographic position of the corresponding different location; and (b-2) the status information is wirelessly communicated between the mobile M and the network; (c) a step of using the data identifying the mobile M to access the data content in the persistent machine data storage, the data content accessed for a step of selecting the at least one entity to be notified regarding the occurrence of the condition; wherein at least one of (c-1) and (c-2) following holds: (c-1) an identification of the occurrence of the condition is dependent upon: a location of the mobile M obtained from the geolocation data, or a determination that the mobile M has moved into or out of one or more zones or areas, and (c-2) the step of selecting the at least one entity is dependent on a wireless location estimate of the at least one entity, and the step of selecting is dependent upon: a location of the mobile M obtained from the geolocation data, or a determination that the mobile M has moved into or out of the one or more zones or areas; (d) a step of providing, for telecommunication transmission, at least one notification for the at least one entity, the at least one notification identifying the mobile M, and the at least one notification including location related information indicative of the location, L, for the mobile M, wherein the location related information is obtained using the geolocation data.
 59. The method of claim 58, wherein the location related information includes a confidence value, wherein the confidence value provides an indication of reliability or accuracy of at least one mobile M location estimate provided for the location related information.
 60. The method of claim 59 further including a step of adjusting the confidence value for the at least one mobile M location estimate, wherein the step of adjusting the confidence value is dependent upon how closely the at least one mobile M location estimate matches a predetermined route.
 61. The method of claim 58, further including a step of determining an estimated velocity of the mobile M, the estimated velocity used in determining the at least one notification.
 62. The method of claim 61, wherein the estimated velocity is used in determining the location related information.
 63. The method of claim 58, further including a step of determining deceleration indicative data for the mobile M, the deceleration indicative data used for determining the at least one notification.
 64. The method of claim 58, wherein one or more notification criteria are evaluated for determining whether the mobile M is within a predetermined proximity of one or more merchants, wherein the one or more notification criteria are used for a step of determining whether the at least one entity is to receive the corresponding one or more notifications for the occurrence of the condition.
 65. The method of claim 58 wherein the mobile M is a vehicle, and further including a step of wirelessly communicating, via the network, with the mobile M such that control data is wirelessly communicated to the mobile M to control or operate a vehicular actuator of the mobile M.
 66. The method of claim 65, wherein the vehicular actuator is for operating a vehicular door lock of the mobile M.
 67. The method of claim 65, wherein the control data is transmitted according to an Internet protocol.
 68. The method of claim 58, wherein the status information is wirelessly received in response to a network transmission corresponding to a vehicle sensor output signal.
 69. The method of claim 58, wherein the mobile M is a vehicle having sensors for sensing one or more of a door position, a keypad depression, a condition of an engine, a condition of a brake, and an amount of a fluid level; wherein the sensors are operatively connected to a communications network within the mobile M for providing a two way wireless communication with remote computational machinery that is configured to remotely control at least one operation at the vehicle for accessing an interior of the vehicle.
 70. The method of claim 58, wherein the mobile M includes a sensor for sensing one of: (i) a change in an acceleration or deceleration force of the mobile M, (ii) the mobile M hitting an object, or (iii) an air bag deployment for the mobile M; wherein an output from the sensor is used to determine the at least notification.
 71. The method of claim 70, wherein the sensor is operatively connected to a communications network within the mobile M, the communications network for providing a two way wireless communication with computational machinery for the service, the computational machinery being remote from the mobile M, the computational machinery for performing at least the step of providing the at least one notification.
 72. The method of claim 70, wherein the occurrence of the condition includes the air bag deployment.
 73. The method of claim 70, wherein the occurrence of the condition includes the mobile M hitting the object.
 74. The method of claim 58 wherein the at least one notification is determined remotely from the mobile M, and further including: a step of identifying the occurrence of the condition, and a step of determining whether the mobile M has moved into or out of the one or more zones or areas.
 75. The method of claim 58 wherein the location related information includes a confidence value, wherein the confidence value provides an indication of reliability or accuracy of at least one mobile M location estimate provided for the location related information; and further including a step of adjusting the confidence value for the at least one mobile M location estimate, wherein the step of adjusting the confidence value is dependent upon how closely the at least one mobile M location estimate corresponds to a different estimate for locating the mobile M.
 76. The method of claim 58, wherein the location related information includes a confidence value, wherein the confidence value provides an indication of reliability or accuracy of at least one mobile M location estimate provided in the location related information; and further including a step of adjusting the confidence value for the at least one mobile M location estimate, wherein the step of adjusting the confidence value is dependent upon how closely the at least one mobile M location estimate corresponds to an extrapolated location estimate of the mobile M.
 77. The method of claim 58, further including a step of comparing at least two location estimates of the mobile M for determining the location related information.
 78. The method of claim 58, further including a step of providing routing or direction information to the at least one entity for navigating to the mobile M.
 79. The method of claim 58, wherein the step of selecting is dependent upon on data indicative of a proximity of the at least one entity to the mobile M.
 80. The method of claim 79, wherein the at least one entity is a person identified by the user for storing an identification of the at least one entity in the data content, and said step of selecting includes a step of determining an authorization for the at least one entity to obtain the at least one notification.
 81. The method of claim 58, wherein the location related information is obtained using the geolocation data to obtain a location of the mobile M by performing at least one of: (1) a triangulation, (2) a multilateration, (3) a trilateration, or (4) a pattern recognition.
 82. The method of claim 81, wherein the pattern recognition is performed for obtaining the location related information, wherein the pattern recognition determines a correspondence between (i) one or more wireless characteristics of the geolocation data, the one or more wireless characteristics obtained from the wireless signals S, and (ii) wireless signal characteristics indicative of previously determined locations for at least one of the wireless mobile telecommunication stations.
 83. The method of claim 58, wherein the at least one entity obtains navigation directions for traveling to the mobile M, wherein the navigation directions are transmitted via the network to the at least one entity, and further including: obtaining an estimated location of each of the at least one entity and the mobile M, the estimated location of the mobile M obtained from the geolocation data; and inputting each of the estimated locations into computational equipment for determining the navigation directions, the computational equipment including an persistent machine data storage having geographical mapping data that is queried in determining the navigation directions.
 84. The method of claim 58, wherein the data indicative of the geographic position of one of the corresponding different locations includes one or more signal characteristics used for determining the location L relative to the one of the corresponding different locations, the one or more signal characteristics used includes one of a signal strength, a signal transmission time, and a characteristic of a signal that has experienced multipath.
 85. The method of claim 58, wherein the geolocation data is for a previous location of the mobile M when a current location estimate of the mobile M is unavailable.
 86. A system for providing a notification of a condition related to an event or circumstance of a mobile M or a user thereof, the mobile M being any one of a plurality of wireless mobile telecommunication units, including vehicular embodiments thereof for wirelessly communicating with a network having a plurality of spaced apart stationary network access units, the access units receiving wireless communications from the mobile M as the mobile M moves in an area having wireless coverage provided by the network, comprising: (a) electronic communications interface componentry for communicating one or more wireless messages between the mobile M and the access units of the network, wherein the one or more wireless messages include status information of the mobile M or the user thereof the status information including: (1) data identifying the mobile M, (2) information indicative of an occurrence of the condition, and (3) geolocation data indicative of a location, L, for the mobile M; wherein the geolocation data is obtained from location indicative data of signals, S, each signal S communicated wirelessly to or from the mobile M, each of the signals S having a corresponding different location for transmitting to, or receiving from, the mobile M, each of the corresponding different locations for one of: (i) wirelessly transmitting one of the signals S for receiving by the mobile M, or (ii) wirelessly receiving, by one of the access units, one of the signals S from the mobile M; (b) a location based service provided by equipment to communicate with the network or an Internet, and to access a data content in a persistent machine data storage, the data content being associated with an identification of the mobile M, and the data content including information related to one or more notification criteria for determining whether at least one entity is to receive at least one notification related to the occurrence of the condition; wherein the equipment providing the location based service determines whether the one or more notification criteria are satisfied for notifying the at least one entity, wherein determining whether the one or more notification criteria are satisfied is dependent upon: an estimate of the location L of the mobile M determined using the geolocation data, or a determination that the mobile M has moved into or out of one or more zones or areas dependent upon the geolocation data; wherein the location based service is configured to perform (b-1) and (b-2) following: (b-1) receive the status information; and (b-2) access the data content in the persistent machine data storage for identifying the at least one entity to receive the at least one notification related to the occurrence of the condition; and wherein the electronic communications interface componentry transmits the at least one notification to the at least one entity, wherein the at least one notification provides information related to the occurrence; and wherein in response to determining the at least one entity, at least a three party telecommunications conference call is established, participants in the conference call include the user of the mobile M and the at least one entity.
 87. The system of claim 86, wherein the electronic communications interface componentry communicates with a predetermined network site for obtaining a previous location of the mobile M when a current location of the mobile M is unavailable.
 88. The system of claim 86, wherein the at least one notification includes the estimate.
 89. The system of claim 88, wherein the location based service initiates a transmission of navigation information for navigating the at least one entity and the mobile M together.
 90. The system of claim 86, wherein the mobile M is a vehicle having sensors for sensing one or more of the following statuses for the mobile M: a door position, a keypad depression, a condition of an engine, a condition of a brake, and an amount of a fluid level; wherein the sensors are operatively connected to a communications network within the mobile M for providing a two way wireless communication with remote computational machinery that is configured to remotely control at least one operation for accessing an interior of the vehicle.
 91. The system of claim 86, wherein the status information is wirelessly received in response to a network transmission corresponding to an output signal of a vehicle sensor, the vehicle sensor provided by the mobile M.
 92. The system of claim 86, further including determining acceleration or deceleration indicative data for the mobile M, the acceleration or deceleration indicative data used in determining the at least one notification.
 93. The method of claim 1, wherein, the location indicative measurement of the signal S is such that the geographic position, of the different location for the signal S and for which the location indicative measurement is indicative, is a position from which the signal S is transmitted to the mobile M.
 94. The method of claim 5, wherein the mobile unit M is a mobile base station.
 95. The system of claim 32, wherein for at least one of the wireless signals, the corresponding different location therefor is a location of a satellite for wirelessly transmitting the at least one signal S for receipt by the mobile M.
 96. The method of claim 58, wherein for at least one of the signals S, the corresponding different location therefor is a location of a satellite for wirelessly transmitting the at least one signal S for receipt by the mobile M.
 97. The method of claim 86, wherein for at least one of the signals S, the corresponding different location therefor is a location of a satellite for wirelessly transmitting the at least one signal S for receipt by the mobile M. 